ST1831 G05 Complete Vehicle

Ref
erenceManual
G05
COMPLETEVEHI
CLE
Techni
calTr
aini
ng
Theinf
ormat
ioncontai
nedi
nthismanuali
snott
oberesol
d,bar
ter
ed,copi
edort
ransf
err
ed
wi
thoutt
heexpresswri
tt
enconsentofBMW ofNor
thAmeri
ca,LLC("
BMW NA" )
.
Copyr
ight© 2018BMW ofNor
thAmer
ica,
LLC
Technical�training.
Product�information.
G05�Body
BMW�Service
General�information
Symbols�used
The�following�symbol�is�used�in�this�document�to�facilitate�better�comprehension�or�to�draw�attention
to�very�important�information:
Contains�important�safety�information�and�information�that�needs�to�be�observed�strictly�in�order�to
guarantee�the�smooth�operation�of�the�system.
Information�status:�July�2018
BMW�Group�vehicles�meet�the�requirements�of�the�highest�safety�and�quality�standards.�Changes
in�requirements�for�environmental�protection,�customer�benefits�and�design�render�necessary
continuous�development�of�systems�and�components.�Consequently,�there�may�be�discrepancies
between�the�contents�of�this�document�and�the�vehicles�available�in�the�training�course.
The�information�contained�in�the�training�course�materials�is�solely�intended�for�participants�in�this
training�course�conducted�by�BMW�Group�Technical�Training�Centers,�or�BMW�Group�Contract
Training�Facilities.
This�training�manual�or�any�attached�publication�is�not�intended�to�be�a�complete�and�all�inclusive
source�for�repair�and�maintenance�data.�It�is�only�part�of�a�training�information�system�designed�to
assure�that�uniform�procedures�and�information�are�presented�to�all�participants.
For�changes/additions�to�the�technical�data,�repair�procedures,�please�refer�to�the�current�information
issued�by�BMW�of�North�America,�LLC,�Technical�Service�Department.
This�information�is�available�by�accessing�TIS�at�www.bmwcenternet.com.
Additional�sources�of�information
Further�information�on�the�individual�topics�can�be�found�in�the�following:
• Owner's�Handbook
• Integrated�Service�Technical�Application
• Aftersales�Information�Research�(AIR)
The�information�contained�in�this�manual�is�not�to�be�resold,�bartered,�copied,�or�transferred
without�the�express�written�consent�of�BMW�of�North�America,�LLC�(“BMW�NA”).
©2018�BMW�of�North�America,�LLC
The�BMW�name�and�logo�are�registered�trademarks.�All�rights�reserved.
G05�Body
Contents
1. Introduction............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 1
1.1. Overview............................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 1
1.2. History�of�X5..................................................................................................................................................................................................................2
1.3. Dimensions�and�comparison�of�outlines.......................................................................................................................... 2
1.3.1. Dimensions�of�G05............................................................................................................................................................2
1.3.2. Comparison�of�F15/G05........................................................................................................................................... 4
1.3.3. Comparison�of�outlines.............................................................................................................................................. 4
1.4. Models..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5
1.4.1. Weights�and�payload...................................................................................................................................................... 5
2. 5.�Exterior�Trim.............................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 6
2.1. Exterior�trim.................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 6
2.2. Vehicle�underbody............................................................................................................................................................................................. 6
3. Bodyshell..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 8
3.1. Body�structure............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 8
3.1.1. Material�overview.................................................................................................................................................................. 8
4. Body�Repair�Level�1................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 9
4.1. Repair�Level�1........................................................................................................................................................................................................... 9
4.2. Outer�body�skin�materials........................................................................................................................................................................ 9
4.3. Upper�section�of�tailgate....................................................................................................................................................................... 10
4.4. Lower�section�of�tailgate....................................................................................................................................................................... 11
5. Heating/Air�Conditioning�Systems..........................................................................................................................................................16
5.1. 3/2-zone�IHKA........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 16
5.2. 4/3-zone�IHKA........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 18
6. Interior�Equipment................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 19
6.1. Overview.......................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 19
6.2. Lines....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 20
6.3. Thermoelectric�cup�holder................................................................................................................................................................. 21
6.4. Seats...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 23
6.4.1. Front�seats.................................................................................................................................................................................. 23
6.4.2. Second�row�of�seats................................................................................................................................................... 24
6.4.3. Second�row�of�seats,�electric....................................................................................................................... 25
6.4.4. Third�row�of�seats........................................................................................................................................................... 29
7. Luggage�Compartment................................................................................................................................................................................................. 31
7.1. Luggage�compartment�capacity............................................................................................................................................... 31
7.1.1. Electric�roller�cover�for�luggage�compartment.................................................................. 32
7.1.2. Luggage�compartment�floor.......................................................................................................................... 37
G05�Body
1.�Introduction
1.1.�Overview
In�November�2018�after�5�years�the�G05�will�replace�its�predecessor�the�F15�with�the�4th�generation
of�the�BMW�X5.�The�G05�contains�an�abundance�of�new�technologies�and�further�developments.
From�a�design�perspective�there�is�no�longer�a�direct�connection�between�the�headlights�and�the
BMW�radiator�grill.�This�design�feature�has�already�been�introduced�in�the�G01�(BMW�X3).�The�larger
wide�BMW�radiator�grill,�however,�features�more�prominently�in�a�more�upright�arrangement�in�the�air
stream.
In�terms�of�technology,�the�new�BMW�X5�is�based�on�the�G12.�The�topics�listed�below�are�described�in
the�G12�product�information�brochures.
Topic Product�information
Heating�and�air�conditioning�system G12�Complete�Vehicle
Lightweight�support,�door G12�Complete�Vehicle
Self-tapping�screws G12�Complete�Vehicle
Active�front�flap G12�Complete�Vehicle
Switch,�seat�adjustment G12�Complete�Vehicle
Massage�function G12�Complete�Vehicle
Refrigerant�line�(inner�heat�exchanger�IWT) G12�Complete�Vehicle
Refrigerant�R1234yf G12�Complete�Vehicle
Coolant-cooled�air�conditioning�condenser G12�Complete�Vehicle
G05
1
G05�Body
1.�Introduction
1.2.�History�of�X5
In�autumn�1999�BMW�presented�the�first�generation�of�the�BMW�X5,�the�E53,�at�the�North�American
International�Auto�Show�and�in�doing�so�justified�the�segment�of�Sports�Activity�Vehicles�(SAV).
The�second�generation,�the�E70,�followed�at�the�end�of�2006�and�from�November�2013�the�third
generation,�the�F15,�will�be�available�in�dealerships.�The�appearance�characteristic�of�BMW�X�models
combines�design�features�typical�of�the�BMW�brand�with�clear�signals�for�presence,�robustness�and
diversity.�The�resulting�design�was�further�developed�for�the�new�BMW�X5�in�a�modern�and�distinctive
way.
History�of�BMW�X5�models
1st�generation 2nd�generation 3rd�generation 4th�generation

E53 E70 F15 G05
1999–2006 2006–2013 2013–2018 2018
1.3.�Dimensions�and�comparison�of�outlines
1.3.1.�Dimensions�of�G05
The�dimensions�of�the�G05�are�set�out�in�the�following�graphic.�In�direct�comparison�with�its
predecessor,�the�F15,�the�G05�has�increased�slightly�in�all�dimensions,�but�thanks�to�its�successful
design�this�is�not�predominant.
G05�outer�dimensions
2
G05�Body
1.�Introduction
Index Explanation Unit G05
a Vehicle�height,�empty [mm] 1744
b Front�track�width,�basic�wheels [mm] 1666
c Front�overhang [mm] 888
d Wheelbase [mm] 2975
e Rear�overhang [mm] 1073
f Rear�track�width,�basic�wheels [mm] 1684
g Vehicle�length [mm] 4936
h Vehicle�width�excluding�exterior�rearview�mirrors [mm] 2004
G05�ground�clearances
Index Explanation Unit F15�X5 G05�X5�xDrive50i

xDrive50i
1 Fording�depth [mm] 500 500
2 Front�overhang�angle Degree 25 25.2
3 Front�axle�clearance [mm] 194 214
4 Ramp�angle Degree 20 21.6
5 Axle�clearance,�rear [mm] 200 214
6 Rear�overhang�angle Degree 22.5 21.6
3
G05�Body
1.�Introduction
1.3.2.�Comparison�of�F15/G05
The�most�important�data�of�the�F15�and�the�G05�are�shown�in�direct�comparison�in�the�following�table.
A�BMW�X5�xDrive40i�is�used�as�the�basis�in�the�G05.
Explanation Unit F15 G05

Vehicle�height,�empty [mm] 1762 1744
Front�track�width [mm] 1644 1666
Front�overhang [mm] 890 888
Wheelbase [mm] 2968 2975
Rear�overhang [mm] 1063 1073
Rear�track�width [mm] 1650 1684
Vehicle�length [mm] 4886 4936
Vehicle�width�excluding�exterior�rearview�mirrors [mm] 1938 2004
Turning�circle�diameter. [m] 12.7 12.6
Shoulder�room,�front [mm] 1537 1525
Shoulder�room,�rear [mm] 1482 1476
Elbow�room,�front [mm] 1562 1560
Elbow�room,�rear [mm] 1525 1525
Maximum�headroom,�front [mm] 1029 1037
Maximum�headroom,�rear [mm] 973 984
Luggage�compartment�capacity [l] 650 650
(without�spare�wheel)
1.3.3.�Comparison�of�outlines
Silhouette�comparison�of�G05/F15
4
G05�Body
1.�Introduction
Silhouette�comparison�of�G05/F16
1.4.�Models
The�G05�will�be�available�at�market�introduction�in�the�following�models�and�exclusively�with�automatic
transmission.
Model Engine Displacement Power�in Torque�in

in�cm³ kW�(HP) Nm�(lb-ft)
BMW�X5 8-cylinder 4395 340�(456) 650�(479)
xDrive50i engine
BMW�X5 6-cylinder 2998 250�(335) 450�(330)
xDrive40i engine
1.4.1.�Weights�and�payload
Models Unit Vehicle�curb�weight�(US)

BMW�X5�xDrive50i lbs 5170
BMW�X5�xDrive40i lbs 4991
5
G05�Body
2.�5.�Exterior�Trim
2.1.�Exterior�trim
G05�exterior�highlights
Index Explanation
1 Air�flaps�in�the�BMW�radiator�grill
2 Headlights�do�not�extend�to�the�BMW�radiator�grill
3 KAFAS�camera�high�(with�3�cameras)
4 Air�breather
5 LED�rear�lights�(on�all�models)
2.2.�Vehicle�underbody
The�almost�fully�closed�vehicle�underbody�plays�an�important�role�in�the�aerodynamics�and�in�reducing
2
CO �emissions.�The�acoustics�in�the�vehicle�are�also�significantly�improved�as�a�result.�The�use�of
textile�material�improves�the�external�acoustics�and�at�the�same�time�reduces�weight.�In�the�front
section,�the�air�flow�is�directed�past�the�front�wheels�with�precision�by�the�diffusers.�In�this�way,�direct
6
G05�Body
2.�5.�Exterior�Trim
impact�of�the�flow�on�the�front�wheel�is�reduced.�In�the�rear�area,�the�2�wind�deflectors�on�the�axle�and
the�cover�of�the�rear�axle�differential�contribute�to�optimized�underbody�flow�together�with�the�diffuser,
which�is�adapted�to�suit�the�motorization.
G05�vehicle�underbody�comparison�with�the�F15
Index Explanation
1 Underbody�panelling�on�the�F15
2 Underbody�panelling�on�the�G05
7
G05�Body
3.�Bodyshell
3.1.�Body�structure
The�lightweight�body�concept�of�the�G05�consists�of�high-strength�and�hot-formed�steel�and
aluminum�components,�where�the�proportion�of�diecast�aluminum�and�extruded�components�has
increased�significantly.�Compared�with�the�F15,�the�engine�supports,�front�side�panel�carrier�supports
and�various�bolted�struts�are�now�also�made�of�aluminum.�Thanks�to�the�material�mix,�the�materials
are�able�to�contribute�their�specific�strengths�to�the�vehicle�in�the�best�possible�way.�As�a�result�of
the�strict�lightweight�construction�philosophy,�the�weight�of�the�body�has�been�reduced�by�around
15.5 kg�compared�with�the�predecessor�F15,�but�crash�safety�has�been�further�improved�and�comfort
enhanced.
3.1.1.�Material�overview
G05�material�overview�in�the�body�structure
Index Explanation
1 Multiphase�steel�(> 300�N/mm²)
2 Ultra-high-strength�steel�(> 900 N/mm²)
3 Aluminum
8
G05�Body
4.�Body�Repair�Level�1
4.1.�Repair�Level�1
Taking�into�account�the�repair�stages�of�the�BMW�workshop�information�system,�the�body�repair�work
in�the�Technical�Training�is�divided�into�3�repair�levels.�Each�of�the�3�Body�Repair�Levels�includes
certain�prerequisites�in�terms�of�the�qualifications�of�the�employees�and�the�workshop�equipment.
The�special�characteristics�of�the�add-on�body�parts�and�the�materials�used�in�the�outer�body�skin�are
described�in�this�chapter.�However,�the�basic�functions�of�the�roof�and�the�outer�body�skin�components
made�of�plastic�are�the�same�as�on�other�current�BMW�models.�For�this�reason,�these�components�will
not�be�described�in�detail�here.
Information�on�the�basic�procedure�for�adjustment�work�on�add-on�body�parts�can�be�found�in�the
Product�Information�"Body�Repair�Level�1"�of�the�standard�body�training�"Body�Repair�Level�1"
as�well�as�in�the�ISTA�workshop�information�system.
4.2.�Outer�body�skin�materials
G05�outer�body�skin�materials
9
G05�Body
Index Explanation
1 Other�steel�grades
2 Aluminum
3 Plastic�(PP�+�EPDM)
4 Deep-drawing�steel
As�with�the�predecessor�F15�the�bonnet�is�made�of�aluminum.�The�front�side�panels�and�all�4�doors
are�also�made�of�aluminum.�This�increase�in�aluminum�components�leads�to�a�significant�reduction�in
weight.�The�roof�and�the�entire�outer�side�frame�are�made�of�deep-drawing�steel.
The�front�and�rear�bumper�panels�as�well�as�the�wheel�arch�and�side�sill�trim�panels�are�made�of�plastic
(PP + EPDM)�as�before.�However,�further�development�of�this�material�made�it�possible�to�reduce�the
density�and�thus�the�weight.
4.3.�Upper�section�of�tailgate
The�tailgate�of�the�G05�is�made�of�two�parts,�similar�to�the�F15.�The�basic�equipment�already�features
electric�spindle�drives�on�the�left�and�right�for�the�tailgate�upper�section.�The�tailgate�lock�and�the�drive
for�Automatic�Soft�Close�are�fitted�in�the�tailgate�lower�section.
G05�upper�section�of�tailgate
10
G05�Body
Index Explanation
1 Spindle�drive,�left/right
2 Tailgate�button
3 Tailgate�lock
4 Automatic�Soft�Close�drive
4.4.�Lower�section�of�tailgate
In�combination�with�the�optional�equipment�Comfort�Access�on�the�X5�xDrive�40i�(SA�322)�the�tailgate
lower�section�now�also�opens�and�closes�automatically�on�the�G05.�A�spindle�drive�integrated�in�the
tailgate�moves�the�tailgate�lower�section�via�a�kinematic�deflection�mechanism�on�the�bonnet�hinge.
Here�the�axial�movement�of�the�spindle�drive�is�converted�by�the�kinematic�mechanism�into�a�rotational
movement�of�the�tailgate,�enabling�the�tailgate�to�open�and�close�by�fully�automatic�means.�Opening
and�closing�of�the�tailgate�sections�can�be�performed�as�follows:
• *Both�tailgate�sections�can�be�opened�or�closed�with�the�button�in�the�driver's�door.
• The�tailgate�upper�section�can�be�opened�or�closed�with�the�button�on�the�ID�transmitter.
• The�tailgate�upper�section�can�be�opened�with�the�outside�button�on�the�tailgate.
• Both�tailgate�sections�can�be�contactlessly�opened�or�closed�with�the�corresponding�foot
movement.
• Both�tailgate�sections�close�automatically�when�the�button�on�the�tailgate�upper�section�is
pressed.
• When�the�button�on�the�tailgate�lower�section�is�pressed,�only�the�tailgate�lower�section�opens
or�closes�automatically�(optional�equipment).
*The�driver�can�also�make�an�adjustment�in�the�CID�under�Setting�Tailgates�so�that�only�the�tailgate
upper�section�opens�or�closes�with�the�button�in�the�driver's�door�trim�panel.
If�the�check�symbol�for�trailer�operation�is�set�in�the�CID,�both�tailgate�sections�can�only�be�opened�or
closed�manually�with�the�button�on�the�tailgate�sections.
11
G05�Body
G05�tailgate�lower�section
Index Explanation
1 Tailgate�lock,�left,�for�tailgate�lower�section
2 Automatic�Soft�Close�drive,�left
3 Spindle�drive,�tailgate�lower�section
4 Kinematic�deflection�mechanism
5 Automatic�Soft�Close�drive,�right
6 Tailgate�lock,�right,�for�tailgate�lower�section
7 Gas�pressure�spring,�right
8 Tailgate�lower�section
9 Gas�pressure�spring,�left
In�contrast�to�the�F15,�where�the�locks�of�the�tailgate�lower�section�were�installed�in�the�tailgate,�on�the
G05�the�tailgate�locks�and�the�associated�Soft�Close�drive�are�installed�in�the�body�side�frame.�This
concept�reduces�the�total�weight�of�the�tailgate.�An�emergency�release�facility�is�available�if�the�tailgate
locks�malfunction.�The�relevant�tailgate�lock�can�be�released�by�inserting�and�turning�a�hexagon�socket
wrench�in�the�direction�of�the�arrow.�Failure�to�observe�the�correct�direction�of�turning�may�result�in
damage�to�the�tailgate�lock.
12
G05�Body
G05�emergency�release�of�lower�section�of�tailgate
You�can�see�the�electric�tailgate�lower�section�in�the�following�wiring�diagram.
13
G05�Body
G05�wiring�diagram�for�electric�lower�section�of�tailgate
14
G05�Body
Index Explanation
1 Body�Domain�Controller�(BDC)
2 CAN�terminator
3 Power�distribution�box,�rear�right
4 Tailgate�function�module
6 Tailgate�lock,�right
7 Spindle�drive�for�tailgate�lower�section
8 Lock�for�tailgate�upper�section
9 Automatic�Soft�Close�drive,�tailgate�upper�section
10 Button�for�tailgate�lower�section
11 Tailgate�lock,�left
15
G05�Body
5.�Heating/Air�Conditioning�Systems
Two�versions�of�the�integrated�automatic�heating/air�conditioning�system�(IHKA)�are�available�for�the
G05.�The�IHKA�regulated�on�the�air�side�is�based�in�part�on�the�G12�and�G01.�Topics�in�the�table�above
are�described�in�the�product�information�G12�Air�Conditioning.
• 3/2-zone�IHKA�(standard�equipment�on�the�xDrive�40i)
• 4/3-zone�IHKA�(optional�on�the�xDrive�40i�standard�on�the�xDrive�50i�)(SA�4NB)
From�a�technical�perspective�the�climate�control�is�divided�into�zones�(e.g.�driver,�front�passenger,
rear�passenger�compartment,�temperature).�The�first�digit�represents�the�individually�adjustable
temperature�settings,�whilst�the�second�digit�represents�the�zones�in�which�the�amount�of�air�can�be
individually�adjusted.�With�the�G05�the�IHKA�display�is�installed�for�the�first�time�between�the�center
ventilation�outlets.
5.1.�3/2-zone�IHKA
A�3/2-zone�IHKA�is�already�installed�as�basic�equipment�in�the�G05.�Three�different�temperature�zones
can�be�set�by�the�driver/front�passenger�and�in�the�rear�passenger�compartment.�The�amount�of�air
can�only�be�regulated�by�the�driver�and�front�passenger.�Automatic�recirculated�air�flap�control,�the
SYNC�function,�stratification,�etc.�can�be�adjusted�in�the�A/C�menu�via�the�CID.�In�the�event�of�strong
sunlight,�the�solar�sensor�on�the�windscreen�regulates�the�air�conditioning�with�temperature,�amount
of�air�and�air�distribution�in�such�a�way�that�the�set�temperature�is�maintained�in�the�vehicle�interior.
IHKA�control�panel�for�driver/front�passenger
Index Explanation
1 Lever�for�changing�the�airflow�direction
2 Knurled�wheel�for�steplessly�opening�and�closing�the�ventilation�outlets
3 Hazard�warning�switch
4 Display
5 Intelligent�Safety�button
16
G05�Body
Index Explanation
6 Active�seat�ventilation/seat�heating,�right
7 Max.�cooling�on/off
8 Air�recirculation�function�on/off
9 Manual�air�distribution�regulation,�right
10 Automatic�program,�right
11 Temperature�adjustment,�right
12 Decrease/increase�amount�of�air,�right
13 Call�up�A/C�menu
14 Decrease/increase�amount�of�air,�left
15 Temperature�adjustment,�left
16 Automatic�program,�left
17 Manual�air�distribution�regulation,�left
18 Rear�window�heating�on/off
19 Windscreen�defrosting/defogging
20 Active�seat�ventilation/seat�heating,�left
With�the�3/2-zone�IHKA,�the�temperature�in�the�rear�passenger�compartment�is�controlled�via
stratification.�The�amount�of�air�for�the�rear�passenger�compartment�is�supplied�via�the�blower
installed�in�the�passenger�footwell,�and�this�can�only�be�adjusted�by�the�driver�or�front�passenger.
17
G05�Body
5.2.�4/3-zone�IHKA
With�optional�equipment�(SA�4NB)�a�4/3�zone�IHKA�is�installed�in�the�G05�which�does�not�differ
visually�from�the�driver/front�passenger�control�panel.�For�the�rear�passenger�compartment�an
additional�blower�is�installed�under�the�driver/front�passenger�center�armrest.�Two�temperature�zones
and�the�amount�of�air�can�be�adjusted�via�a�separate�control�panel�in�the�rear�passenger�compartment.
Individual�air�distribution�and�an�automatic�program�are�additionally�available�for�the�rear�passenger
compartment.
4/3-zone�IHKA�control�panel,�rear�passenger�compartment
Index Explanation
1 Seat�heating,�left
2 Automatic�program
4 Decrease/increase�amount�of�air
5 Manual�air�distribution�regulation
8 Seat�heating,�right
9 Display
18
G05�Body
6.�Interior�Equipment
6.1.�Overview
The�vehicle�interior�shows�significant�further�developments�in�comparison�to�the�F15.�The�spatial
impression�and�all-round�visibility�have�been�improved.�This�is�further�supported�by�the�very�flat�design
of�the�roof�function�center.�In�addition,�the�headliner,�which�is�equipped�with�sound�insulation,�helps
to�make�it�noticeably�easier�for�passengers�to�converse�with�each�other�between�the�first�and�second
rows�of�seats.�The�new�X5�features�many�design�changes:�starting�with�the�Central�Information
Display�(CID),�which�is�angled�slightly�towards�the�instrument�cluster;�also�the�integrated�A/C�control
panel�with�display�between�the�center�ventilation�outlets.�The�door�opener�has�also�been�adapted�to
the�modern�vehicle�interior.�With�the�optional�equipment�heat�comfort�package�(SA�4HB)�the�front
seats,�armrests�in�the�door�trim�panels�and�on�the�center�console�and�steering�wheel�are�heated.
G05�front�overview
19
G05�Body
Index Explanation
a Roof�operating�unit
b Center�console�storage�compartment,�front
c Overview,�door�trim�panel,�driver's�side
1 Gesture�recognition�camera
2 Light�operating�unit
3 Instrument�cluster
4 Roof�function�center
5 Frameless�mirror
6 Central�Information�Display�(CID)
7 Heating�and�air�conditioning�system�display
8 Heating�and�air�conditioning�controls
9 Audio�control�panel
10 Glove�box
11 Wireless�charging�station�and�thermoelectric�cup�holder
12 Center�armrest
13 Tailgate�button
14 Gentleman�function,�front�passenger�seat
15 Glove�box,�driver's�side
6.2.�Lines
In�addition�to�the�comprehensive�offering�of�optional�equipment,�the�G05�can�also�be�individualized
with�the�following�equipment�packages.�The�equipment�packages�contain�both�general�optional
equipment�and�line-specific�features.�The�content�of�the�equipment�packages�is�partly�binding�and
cannot�be�changed.
The�new�BMW�X5�can�be�ordered�with�X�Line�or�with�the�BMW�M�Sport�package.
20
G05�Body
G05�lines
Index Explanation
A BMW�M�Sport�package
B X�Line
6.3.�Thermoelectric�cup�holder
With�the�optional�equipment�SA�442�a�thermoelectric�cup�holder�is�used�for�the�first�time�in�a�BMW�in
the�G05.�This�is�fitted�as�usual�in�front�of�the�selector�lever�in�the�center�console.�The�two�cup�holders
can�be�operated�separately�and�differently.�Depending�on�the�setting,�the�color�of�the�light�changes
from�blue�when�cooling�to�red�when�heating.�A�temperature�range�of�approx.�3 °C�to�55 °C�(37 °F�to
131 °F)�is�achieved�by�means�of�a�Peltier�element.�Drinks�cannot�be�actively�cooled�down�or�heated
up.�The�function�is�solely�for�keeping�drinks�cold�or�hot�for�an�extended�period.
21
G05�Body
G05�thermoelectric�cup�holder
Index Explanation
a Switched�on�to�cool�drinks
b Switched�on�to�heat�drinks
1 Switch�for�front�passenger
2 Switch�for�driver
G05�wiring�diagram�for�thermoelectric�cup�holder
22
G05�Body
Index Explanation
1 Fuse�in�power�distribution�box,�front�right
3 Thermoelectric�cup�holder
6.4.�Seats
6.4.1.�Front�seats
As�a�design�element,�the�seats�are�an�important�element�of�a�sporty-luxurious�vehicle�interior.
The�seats�provided�as�standard�offer�the�customer�maximum�comfort�and�safety.�Special�stitching
accents�are�provided�in�the�form�of�decorative�stitches�for�the�Venasca�leather�trim�and�backstitching
for�the�Merino�leather�trim.�All�seat�adjustments�are�fully�electric.�The�customer�can�choose�seat
heating�and�climate�control,�backrest�width�adjustment�as�well�as�lumbar�support�and�massage�as
optional�equipment.�Until�now�the�customer�could�choose�between�a�basic�seat,�a�sports�seat�and�a
multifunction�seat.�In�the�G05�the�sports�seat�is�already�installed�as�the�basic�seat,�version�1�is�thus
discontinued.
With�the�Multi-contour�seats�optional�on�the�xDrive�40i�(SA�456)�and�standard�on�the�xDrive�50i�an
additional�button�(gentleman�function)�is�installed�in�the�door�trim�panel�on�the�driver's�side.�(See
Overview�picture�in�the�section�6.1�Interior�equipment�no.�14).�When�this�button�is�pressed�by�the
driver,�seat�adjustment�switches�from�the�driver's�side�to�the�passenger's�side.�This�is�indicated�by
a�green�LED�lighting�up�on�the�button.�As�long�as�the�LED�is�lit�the�driver�can�use�the�adjustment
switches�on�the�driver's�seat�to�make�the�same�adjustments�for�the�front�passenger�seat�as�for�the
driver's�seat.
G05�seat�versions
23
G05�Body
Index Explanation
1 Basic�seat�no�longer�available
2 Sports�seat�(the�standard�seat�in�the�xDrive�40i)
3 Multi-contour�seat�(the�standard�seat�in�the�xDrive�50i
and�optional�in�the�xDrive�40i)
The�multi-contour�seat�offers�the�customer�maximum�comfort.�The�customer�experiences�the
greatest�degree�of�comfort�as�soon�as�they�get�into�the�vehicle�and�can�travel�relaxed�even�on�long
trips.�A�massage�system�in�the�seat�cushion�and�backrest�surfaces�can�also�be�ordered�for�the�multi-
contour�seat.�All�possible�seat�adjustments�are�fully�electric.�On�the�multifunction�seat,�5�touch-
sensitive�sensors�are�integrated�in�the�switches�for�fore-and-aft�seat�adjustment.�As�a�result,�when
the�adjustment�switch�is�touched�a�pop-up�is�opened�in�the�Central�Information�Display�(CID),�which
shows�the�function�and�adjustment�range�of�the�switch�that�has�been�touched.�Further�information�on
this�topic�can�be�found�in�the�Product�Information�G12�Complete�Vehicle.
Function Sports�seat Multi-contour�seat

Seat�memory Standard Standard
Heated�seats Standard Standard
Lumbar�support Standard Standard
Active�seat�ventilation OE�453 SA�453
Massage�function OE�4T7 SA�4T7
6.4.2.�Second�row�of�seats
The�decorative�stitches,�backstitching�and�contrast�colors�already�familiar�from�the�first�row�of�seats
are�also�carried�over�into�the�second�row�of�seats,�where�they�help�create�a�harmonious�overall
impression.�Functionality�is�underlined�thanks�to�the�easily�accessible�ISOFIX�attachments�and�the
cup�holders�in�the�center�armrest.�The�usual�40:�20:�40�folding�backrest�from�the�established�SA�465
is�of�tremendous�benefit�to�the�customer.�This�is�unlocked�in�the�basic�equipment�via�a�cable�from�the
luggage�compartment�or�on�the�backrest.
Customers�can�also�select�seat�heating�for�the�front�and�rear�passenger�seats�as�optional�equipment
SA�4HA.
24
G05�Body
G05�rear�seats
Index Explanation
1 Cup�holder
2 Release�to�tilt�the�head�restraint
3 Release�to�tilt/fold�the�backrest
4 Button�for�electric�comfort�entry�(optional�equipment�with�3rd�row�seat)
5 ISOFIX
6 Button�for�electric�seat�adjustment�(optional�equipment�with�3rd�row�seat)
6.4.3.�Second�row�of�seats,�electric
In�conjunction�with�the�3rd�row�of�seats�the�backrest�on�the�2nd�row�of�seats�is�adjusted,�folded
down�and�positioned�upright�by�fully�electric�means�via�two�electric�motors�which�are�installed�in�the
backrest.�These�functions�are�not�available�when�the�lock�button�for�the�power�windows�is�activated
in�the�driver's�door�trim�panel.�Comfort�entry�for�the�3rd�row�of�seats�is�also�provided�by�fully�electric
means�via�two�electric�motors�in�each�case�which�are�installed�in�the�seat�cushion�surface.�Electric
comfort�entry�has�an�anti-trap�function�which�is�provided�by�evaluating�the�power�consumption�of�the
electric�motors.�In�addition,�electric�forward/back�adjustment�of�the�individual�seats�with�two�electric
motors�by�80 mm�provides�increased�comfort�or�a�larger�load�space�in�the�luggage�compartment.
These�functions�are�controlled�separately�by�two�control�units�on�the�left�and�right.�If�seats�are
replaced�in�a�vehicle,�they�must�be�retaught�with�the�ISTA�diagnosis�system.
25
G05�Body
Second�row�of�seats,�electric
Index Explanation
1 Electric�motors�for�adjusting,�folding�down�and�setting�upright�the�backrest
2 Electric�motors�for�forward/back�adjustment
3 Electric�motors�for�comfort�entry
26
G05�Body
Wiring�diagram,�second�row�of�seats,�electric
27
G05�Body
Index Explanation
1 Fuse,�front�right
2 Body�Domain�Controller
3 Seat�adjustment�switch,�rear�right
4 CAN�terminator
5 Switch�for�through-loading�facility,�right
6 Seat�module,�rear�right
7 Switch�for�seat�folding�function,�right
8 Backrest�angle�adjustment�motor,�right
9 Comfort�entry�switch,�right
10 Motor�for�forward/back�seat�adjustment,�right
11 Comfort�entry�switch,�right
12 Microswitch,�end�position,�comfort�entry,�right
13 Seat�heating�pad,�seat�surface,�passenger’s�side�rear
14 Switch�for�backrest�emergency�release,�right
15 Seat�heating�pad,�backrest,�passenger’s�side�rear
16 Fuse,�rear�right
17 Rear�function�module
18 Switch�for�forward/back�seat�adjustment�in�the�luggage�compartment
19 Seat�heating�pad,�backrest,�driver’s�side�rear
20 Switch�for�backrest�emergency�release,�left
21 Seat�heating�pad,�seat�surface,�driver’s�side�rear
22 Microswitch,�end�position,�comfort�entry
23 Motor�for�comfort�entry,�left
24 Microswitch,�end�position,�comfort�entry
25 Motor�for�forward/back�seat�adjustment,�left
26 Comfort�entry�switch,�left
27 Backrest�angle�adjustment�motor,�left
28 Seat�folding�switch,�left
29 Seat�module,�rear�left
30 Switch�for�through-loading�facility,�left
31 Seat�adjustment�switch,�rear�left
32 Memory�switch
28
G05�Body
6.4.4.�Third�row�of�seats
The�3rd�row�of�seats�+�2–axle�air�suspension�(SA�4UB)�is�integrated�in�the�luggage�compartment�and
cannot�be�retrofitted.�Where�necessary,�the�seats�can�as�on�the�F15�be�individually�folded�down�in
line�with�the�luggage�compartment�floor�to�create�a�flat�large�compartment�surface.�The�seats�are
unlocked�and�folded�by�completely�mechanical�means.�Two�cup�holders�are�installed�in�the�center
console�between�the�seat�cushion�surfaces.
G05�third�row�of�seats
Index Explanation
a 3rd�row�seats�in�upright�position
b Seat�folded�down�level�with�the�luggage�compartment�floor
Armrests�are�integrated�in�the�side�trim�panels�in�the�luggage�compartment.�Separate�heating�and
ventilation�for�the�3rd�row�of�seats�can�be�switched�off�and�on�via�a�button�in�the�center�console.�An
electric�auxiliary�heater�(PTC)�is�controlled�via�a�knurled�wheel.�Active�cooling�via�the�air�conditioning
system�is�not�possible.
29
G05�Body
G05�auxiliary�heating,�3rd�row�of�seats
Index Explanation
1 Button�for�switching�the�blower�on�and�off
2 Knurled�wheel�for�cold/hot�adjustment
30
G05�Body
7.�Luggage�Compartment
7.1.�Luggage�compartment�capacity
The�luggage�compartment�capacity�of�the�new�BMW�X5�has�not�changed�compared�with�its
predecessor�F15�and�remains�at�650 liters.�In�the�basic�version�the�G05�has�a�manual�roller�cover�for
the�luggage�compartment�which�has�a�separate�stowage�space�under�the�luggage�compartment�floor.
With�the�optional�equipment�luggage�compartment�package�(SA�418)�–�not�possible�in�conjunction
with�the�3rd�row�of�seats,�an�electric�roller�cover�for�the�luggage�compartment�is�installed.�When�the
tailgate�is�opened,�this�roller�cover�automatically�travels�completely�up�to�the�backrest�of�the�2nd�row
of�seats.�When�the�tailgate�is�closed,�the�roller�cover�also�closes�automatically.�The�roller�cover�can
also�be�opened�or�closed�manually�by�means�of�two�buttons�installed�in�the�luggage�compartment
trim�panel.�If�the�complete�luggage�compartment�capacity�of�the�G05�with�folded-down�rear�seats
is�required,�the�roller�cover�can�be�electrically�retracted�under�the�luggage�compartment�floor�by
pressing�the�button�in�the�luggage�compartment�trim�panel.�The�panel�in�the�luggage�compartment
floor�opens�and�closes�automatically�with�the�aid�of�a�separate�electric�motor.�The�optional�equipment
space�saver�spare�(SA�300)�can�be�ordered�for�both�equipment�specifications�(basic�roller�cover�for
luggage�compartment�and�electric�roller�cover�for�luggage�compartment).
G05�luggage�compartment
31
G05�Body
Index Explanation
1 Luggage�compartment�floor
2 Luggage�compartment�removable�panel,�electric�roller�cover�for�luggage
compartment
3 Electric�roller�cover�for�luggage�compartment
4 Button�for�electric�roller�cover�for�luggage�compartment
5 Basic�roller�cover�for�luggage�compartment
6 Lever�for�unlocking�backrest�of�2nd�row�of�seats
7.1.1.�Electric�roller�cover�for�luggage�compartment
The�electric�roller�cover�for�the�luggage�compartment�has�a�technical�design�similar�to�a�panorama
roof.�The�roller�cover�is�retracted�and�opened�or�closed�via�two�drive�cables�by�an�electric�motor
installed�under�the�luggage�compartment�floor.�During�opening�and�closing�the�roller�cover�is�rolled�via
the�drive�cables.�During�retraction�under�the�luggage�compartment�floor�the�entire�roller�cover�unit�is
retracted�via�the�same�drive�cables.�The�anti-trap�facility�is�provided�during�retraction�by�evaluating�the
drive�motor's�power�consumption.
For�the�roller�cover�for�the�luggage�compartment�a�separate�control�unit�is�responsible�for�the�following
functions:
• Actuation�of�the�drive�motor�for�the�roller�cover
• Actuation�of�the�drive�motor�for�the�luggage�compartment�removable�panel
• Evaluation�of�the�drive�motor's�power�consumption�for�the�anti-trap�facility
• Evaluation�of�the�Hall-effect�sensors�in�the�drive�motors�for�position�detection
32
G05�Body
BMW�G30�switches,�luggage�compartment�trim�panel
Index Explanation
a Switch�unit,�luggage�compartment�trim�panel,�left
1 Backrest�unlocking
2 Button�for�opening/closing�roller�cover
3 Button�for�retracting�roller�cover�under�luggage�compartment�floor
The�different�positions�of�the�roller�cover�are�illustrated�in�the�graphic�below.
G05�sequence�of�movements�of�roller�cover�for�luggage�compartment
33
G05�Body
Index Explanation
1 Roller�cover�closed
2 Roller�cover�opened
3 Roller�cover�retracted�under�luggage�compartment�floor
When�the�roller�cover�is�closed,�the�sliding�carriage�is�moved�over�the�drive�cables�into�the�guide�rails.
If�the�roller�cover�hits�an�obstruction�during�the�closing�operation,�the�roller�cover�driver�is�clipped�out
of�the�sliding�carriage.�After�triggering,�the�driver�must�be�clipped�by�hand�into�the�sliding�carriage.
BMW�G05�drive�cable�plate,�roller�cover�for�luggage�compartment
34
G05�Body
Index Explanation
1 Drive�cable
2 Sliding�carriage
3 Roller�cover�driver
4 Clamping�spring
The�electric�roller�cover�for�the�luggage�compartment�is�shown�in�the�following�wiring�diagram.
35
G05�Body
G05�wiring�diagram,�electric�roller�cover�for�luggage�compartment
36
G05�Body
Index Explanation
2 CAN�terminator
3 Fuses�in�the�power�distribution�box,�rear�right
5 Control�unit,�roller�cover
6 Button�for�manual�roller�cover�operation
7 Drive�motor,�luggage�compartment�removable�panel
8 Drive�motor,�roller�cover
7.1.2.�Luggage�compartment�floor
With�the�launch�of�the�G05�the�optional�equipment�luggage�compartment�package�(SA�418)�is
extended�to�include�an�electric�roller�cover�for�the�luggage�compartment�and�automatic�anti-slip�rails.
4�aluminum-rubber�rails�integrated�in�the�luggage�compartment�floor�automatically�secure�the�load�in
the�luggage�compartment�after�the�tailgate�sections�are�closed.�Two�drive�motors�under�the�luggage
compartment�floor�automatically�extend�the�rubber�rails�approximately�3 mm�and�thereby�prevent�load
items�from�sliding�back�and�forth�in�the�luggage�compartment.�The�rubber�rails�retract�automatically
when�the�tailgate�sections�are�opened.�If�the�vehicle�is�parked�on�a�slope�with�an�angle�>13.5°,�the
rubber�rails�remain�extended�even�when�the�tailgate�sections�are�opened.�This�stops�any�load�items
from�falling�out�of�the�luggage�compartment�when�the�tailgate�sections�are�opened.
37
G05�Body
G05�anti-slip�rails
Index Explanation
1 Aluminum�frame
2 Anti-slip�rail�(rubber�strip)
3 Drive�motor,�luggage�compartment�removable�panel,�roller�cover
4 Drive�motor,�anti-slip�rails,�right
5 Drive�motor,�anti-slip�rails,�left
38
G05�Body
G05�drive,�anti-slip�rails
Index Explanation
A Anti-slip�rail�retracted
B Anti-slip�rail�extended
1 Aluminum�frame
2 Anti-slip�rail�(rubber�strip)
3 Driver
4 Sliding�carriage
5 Drive�motor
39
G05�Body
G05�wiring�diagram,�luggage�compartment�floor
40
G05�Body
Index Explanation
3 Control�unit�for�the�anti-slip�rails
4 Drive�motor,�anti-slip�rail,�right
5 Drive�motor,�anti-slip�rail,�left
41
G05�Powertrain/Chassis
BMW�Service
Symbols�used
Contents
1. Drive.......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................1
1.1. Powertrain�variants�G05.............................................................................................................................................................................. 1
1.1.1. Models................................................................................................................................................................................................... 1
1.2. Differences�in�drives�F15/G05.......................................................................................................................................................... 2
2. Engines............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 3
2.1. B58TU�Engine............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 3
2.1.1. Special�features�of�B58TU�engine........................................................................................................... 3
2.2. N63TU3�Engine....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4
2.2.1. Special�features�of�N63TU3�engine....................................................................................................... 4
2.3. Further�information............................................................................................................................................................................................. 4
2.3.1. Product�Info................................................................................................................................................................................... 4
3. Engine�Mechanical..................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5
3.1. Vacuum�supply.......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5
3.1.1. Vacuum�pump............................................................................................................................................................................5
4. Automatic�Transmission..................................................................................................................................................................................................6
4.1. Automatic�transmission�GA8HPTU2......................................................................................................................................6
4.1.1. Special�features...................................................................................................................................................................... 6
5. Front�Axle�Differential......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 8
5.1. Use�of�front�axle�transmission...........................................................................................................................................................8
5.1.1. Variants................................................................................................................................................................................................. 8
6. Rear�Axle�Final�Drive............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 9
6.1. Use�of�rear�axle�differential.................................................................................................................................................................... 9
6.1.1. Variants................................................................................................................................................................................................. 9
6.2. Rear�axle�differential�with�lock.......................................................................................................................................................... 9
6.2.1. Design................................................................................................................................................................................................ 11
7. Transfer�Box.......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................13
7.1. Transfer�box�ATC13-1............................................................................................................................................................................... 13
7.1.1. Special�features.................................................................................................................................................................. 13
8. Display/Operating�Concept................................................................................................................................................................................... 14
8.1. Oil�level�measurement............................................................................................................................................................................... 14
8.2. Sport�displays..........................................................................................................................................................................................................15
9. Chassis�and�Suspension............................................................................................................................................................................................16
9.1. Introduction................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 16
9.2. Chassis�and�suspension�comparison............................................................................................................................... 17
Contents
9.3. Overview�of�system�descriptions............................................................................................................................................. 18
9.4. Chassis�and�suspension�packages.......................................................................................................................................19
9.4.1. Abbreviations.......................................................................................................................................................................... 19
9.4.2. Basic�chassis�and�suspension.................................................................................................................... 20
9.4.3. Adaptive�M�suspension�(SA 2VF).......................................................................................................... 20
9.4.4. Adaptive�M�suspension�Professional�(SA 2VW)..............................................................20
9.4.5. 2–axle�Air�Suspension�(SA 2VR).............................................................................................................. 20
9.4.6. xOffroad package(SA ZOR)............................................................................................................................ 21
9.5. xOffroad�package.............................................................................................................................................................................................. 21
9.5.1. Operation.......................................................................................................................................................................................22
9.5.2. Operating�strategy..........................................................................................................................................................23
9.5.3. Displays............................................................................................................................................................................................26
10. Axles.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................30
10.1. Front�axle........................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 30
10.1.1. Vibration�absorber.......................................................................................................................................................... 31
11. Two-axle�Ride�Level�Control.............................................................................................................................................................................. 32
11.1. History................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 33
11.2. Comparison�of�G12�with�G05....................................................................................................................................................... 34
11.3. Structure�and�function.............................................................................................................................................................................. 34
11.3.1. Control�when�driving.................................................................................................................................................. 34
11.3.2. Air�supply�unit....................................................................................................................................................................... 36
11.3.3. Pressure�accumulator............................................................................................................................................... 40
11.3.4. Air�suspension�strut.................................................................................................................................................... 41
11.3.5. Pneumatic�circuit�diagram................................................................................................................................. 43
11.4. Operating�strategy........................................................................................................................................................................................... 52
11.4.1. Control�options.................................................................................................................................................................... 53
11.4.2. Control�inhibitors.............................................................................................................................................................. 54
11.4.3. Speed-dependent�ride�heights..................................................................................................................55
11.4.4. Manually�selectable�ride�heights.............................................................................................................56
11.4.5. Offroad�ride�heights.....................................................................................................................................................59
11.4.6. Water�crossing�detection.................................................................................................................................... 60
11.4.7. Touchdown�detection............................................................................................................................................... 61
11.4.8. Tire�load�removal�function................................................................................................................................. 62
11.4.9. Trailer�towing...........................................................................................................................................................................63
11.5. Notes�for�Service............................................................................................................................................................................................... 64
11.5.1. Transport�mode...................................................................................................................................................................64
11.5.2. Vehicle�lift�mode................................................................................................................................................................ 64
11.5.3. Jack........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 64
Contents
11.5.4. Workshop�mode.................................................................................................................................................................65
11.5.5. Swapping�of�air�lines.................................................................................................................................................. 65
11.5.6. Servicing�of�the�pneumatic�system.....................................................................................................65
11.5.7. Ride�height�adjustment.......................................................................................................................................... 67
11.5.8. Leakages........................................................................................................................................................................................67
11.5.9. Display�Key................................................................................................................................................................................ 68
11.6. System�wiring�diagram............................................................................................................................................................................. 69
12. Brakes............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 71
12.1. Service�brake............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 72
12.1.1. Variants............................................................................................................................................................................................. 72
12.1.2. Brake�discs................................................................................................................................................................................. 73
12.2. Parking�brake............................................................................................................................................................................................................74
13. Wheels�and�Tires......................................................................................................................................................................................................................75
13.1. Run�flat�tire.................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 75
13.1.1. Puncture......................................................................................................................................................................................... 75
13.2. Offroad�tires............................................................................................................................................................................................................... 76
13.2.1. Technical�data........................................................................................................................................................................76
13.2.2. Grabber�AT3�tire�tread............................................................................................................................................. 77
13.3. Integrated�RDCi�tire�pressure�monitor.............................................................................................................................77
13.3.1. Electronic�tire�pressures�label..................................................................................................................... 78
13.4. Wheel�bolts................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 78
14. Driving�Stability�Control............................................................................................................................................................................................. 79
14.1. Bus�overview............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 79
14.2. Steering............................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 80
14.2.1. Rear�axle�slip�angle�control�HSR............................................................................................................. 81
14.3. Dynamic�Stability�Control�integrated�DSCi.............................................................................................................. 81
14.3.1. Features.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 82
14.3.2. Special�features.................................................................................................................................................................. 84
14.3.3. Brake�functions................................................................................................................................................................... 84
14.3.4. System�wiring�diagram............................................................................................................................................86
14.4. Vehicle�dynamics�functions.............................................................................................................................................................. 87
14.4.1. Abbreviations.......................................................................................................................................................................... 89
1.�Drive
A�new�feature�of�the�G05�is�more�stringent�compliance�with�the�exhaust�emission�standards.�This
is�achieved�by�implementing�changes�to�the�injection�system�(increasing�injection�pressure�up�to
350 bar)�or�to�engine�cooling�type�(Split�Cooling).
1.1.�Powertrain�variants�G05
G05�powertrain
1.1.1.�Models
The�G05�will�be�launched�in�the�US�market�in�November�2018�with�the�following�models:
Model Engine Power�output Torque Displacement

[kW�(HP)] [Nm�(lb-ft)] 3
[cm ]
BMW�X5�xDrive40i B58B30M1 250�(335) 500�(330) 2998
BMW�X5�xDrive50i N63B44M3 340�(456) 650�(479) 4395
1
1.�Drive
1.2.�Differences�in�drives�F15/G05
Component F15 G05
Engine�generation N-series�engines B-series�engines
Rear�axle�differential�lock no yes
Rear�axle�lateral�torque yes no
distribution
Brake�system Dynamic�Stability Dynamic�Stability
Control�(DSC) Control�integrated�(DSCi)
2
2.�Engines
2.1.�B58TU�Engine
2.1.1.�Special�features�of�B58TU�engine
B58TU�engine
• Split�cooling
• Cylinder�head-integrated�exhaust�manifold
• Single-part�chain�drive
• High-pressure�injection�of�up�to�350 bar.
3
2.�Engines
2.2.�N63TU3�Engine
2.2.1.�Special�features�of�N63TU3�engine
N63TU3�engine
• Exhaust�turbocharger�with�overboost�function
• Indirect�charge�air�cooling�with�bypass�pipe
• High-pressure�injection�of�up�to�350 bar
• Digital�Motor�Electronics�(DME)�8.8T
2.3.�Further�information
2.3.1.�Product�Info
Detailed�descriptions�of�the�engines�can�be�found�in�the�following�Product�Information:
• Product�Information�B58TU�Engine
• Product�information�N63TU3�Engine
4
3.�Engine�Mechanical
3.1.�Vacuum�supply
3.1.1.�Vacuum�pump
Vehicles�with�gasoline�engines�and�"conventional�brake�systems"�require�a�vacuum�pump�for�brake
assist.�Vehicles�with�gasoline�engines�and�DSCi�brake�systems�do�not�require�a�vacuum�booster�as�the
pedal�force�in�the�DSCi�brake�system�is�increased�hydraulically.�The�graphics�show�the�oil�pumps�of
the�B58�engine�and�B58TU�engine�with�and�without�combined�vacuum�pump.
Comparison�between�oil�pumps�of�B58�engine�and�B58TU�engine
Index Explanation
A B58�engine,�tandem�oil�pump�with�integrated�vacuum�pump
B B58TU�engine,�oil�pump
1 Vacuum�pump
2 Oil�pump
5
4.�Automatic�Transmission
4.1.�Automatic�transmission�GA8HPTU2
GA8HPTU2�automatic�transmission
In�the�G05�is�equipped�with�the�GA8HPTU2�automatic�transmission.�Two�variants�are�used,�depending
on�the�engine�type:
Engine Automatic�transmission
B58B30M1 8HP51
N63B44M3 8HP76
4.1.1.�Special�features
The�following�further�developments�made�it�possible�to�increase�the�comfort,�dynamics�and�efficiency
of�the�8-speed�automatic�transmission:
• As�the�gear�shift�intervals�have�increased,�it�has�been�possible�to�increase�the�range.
• The�shifting�dynamics�have�been�improved�through�redevelopment�of�the�electronic
transmission�control�(EGS).
• Improved�driving�comfort�by�using�a�centrifugal�pendulum�to�counteract�the�rotational
irregularity�of�the�engine.
• Enhanced�customer�experience�due�to�new�operating�possibilities�with�the�driving�experience
switch�or�shift�paddles.
6
4.�Automatic�Transmission
Emergency�release
As�is�already�known�to�be�the�case�with�the�automatic�transmission�8HPTU,�the�automatic
transmission�8HPTU2�can�be�also�be�unlocked�in�different�ways�in�the�event�of�a�breakdown�to�ensure
the�vehicle�can�be�rolled:
• Mechanical�emergency�release.
• Electronic�emergency�release.
Towing�the�vehicle�with�one�axle�lifted�is�not�permitted��Although�the�automatic�transmission
would�in�fact�survive�towing�for�a�time�depending�on�the�speed�without�being�damaged,�it�cannot
be�guaranteed�that�the�parking�lock�would�be�permanently�unlocked�due�to�modification�of�the
mechanical�or�electronic�transmission�emergency�release.�If�the�parking�lock�were�suddenly�to�be
engaged�during�a�towing�operation,�the�components�and�vehicle�could�be�damaged�and�a�serious
accident�could�occur�
7
5.�Front�Axle�Differential
5.1.�Use�of�front�axle�transmission
5.1.1.�Variants
Two�different�front�axle�transmissions�with�the�following�designation�are�used:
• VAG�168AL
• VAG�175AL
Adaptations
• Adapted�axle�ratio�for�the�G05.
• Changeover�to�a�low�viscosity�oil.
• Optimization�of�transmission�oil�flow�for�lower�transmission�oil�temperatures
and�reduction�of�heat�entering�the�front�axle�transmission.
• Reduction�in�weight�and�splash�losses�due�to�welding�of�ring�gear.
These�measures�have�made�it�possible�once�again�to�increase�the�efficiency�of�the�front�axle
transmission�and�reduce�carbon�dioxide�emissions.
8
6.�Rear�Axle�Final�Drive
6.1.�Use�of�rear�axle�differential
6.1.1.�Variants
Two�different�rear�axle�differentials�with�the�following�designation�are�used:
• HAG�205AL
• HAG�215LW
Adaptations
• Adapted�axle�ratio�for�the�G05.
• Use�of�thin�oil.
• Technical�measures�for�optimizing�the�weight.
As�a�result�of�these�measures,�it�was�possible�to�increase�the�efficiency�of�the�rear�axle�differential�and
reduce�carbon�dioxide�emissions.
6.2.�Rear�axle�differential�with�lock
The�all-wheel�drive�version�of�the�G05�can�be�equipped�with�a�rear�axle�differential�with�locking
function�HAG�215LWS.�The�regulated�rear�axle�differential�lock�can�be�identified�by�an�e-motor�which
is�screwed�on�from�the�outside.�Furthermore,�a�housing�cover�made�of�aluminium�is�installed�which
closes�the�existing�grey�cast�iron�housing�to�the�rear.
9
G05�rear�axle�differential�lock�HAG�215LWS
Index Explanation
1 Ventilation�line
2 Housing�cover
3 Housing
4 Holder�for�heat�shield
5 Electric�motor
6 Heat�shield
7 Electrical�connection,�electric�motor
8 Transmission�oil�temperature�sensor
9 Oil�filler�plug
The�regulated�rear�axle�differential�lock�is�an�electromechanical�rear�axle�differential�lock�which�is
based�on�the�current�M�differential�of�M�GmbH.�The�regulated�rear�axle�differential�lock�allows�the
slip�between�the�right�and�left�rear�wheel�to�be�reduced�by�establishing�a�friction-locked�connection
between�both�wheels�via�a�multidisc�clutch.�If�required,�the�multidisc�clutch�package�is�closed�via�an
e-motor�and�is�applied�between�the�rear�wheel�and�differential�housing.�A�lock-up�torque�of�up�to
1500 Nm�can�be�generated�irrespective�of�the�requested�drive�torque.
10
The�advantages�compared�to�a�differential�without�regulated�lock�are:
• Optimal�traction
• Greater�driving�stability
• Improved�handling
6.2.1.�Design
Inner�structure
G05�rear�axle�differential�with�lock�HAG�215LWS,�layout
Index Explanation
1 Ring�wheel
2 Differential�bevel�gear
3 Bevel�pinion
4 Multidisc�clutch
5 Pressure�disc�with�second�ball�ramp
6 Ball�ramp
7 Transfer�box
8 Electric�motor
11
Index Explanation
9 Spherical�disc�and�ball
10 Differential�cover
11 Differential�housing
12 Differential�bevel�gear
13 Output�bevel�gear
The�drive�torque�to�be�transmitted�at�the�wheels�of�the�rear�axle�is�calculated�in�the�Dynamic�Stability
Control�(DSC)�and�forwarded�to�the�regulated�rear�axle�differential�lock�(GHAS)�control�unit�via�a
FlexRay�bus.�The�regulated�rear�axle�differential�lock�control�unit�calculates�the�adjusting�torque�to�be
set�at�the�toothed�mobile�adjusting�disc�of�the�ball�ramp�based�on�the�requested�drive�torque.
The�adjusting�torque�required�for�control�is�generated�by�the�electric�motor.�The�rotational�movement
of�the�electric�motor�is�converted�to�an�axial�movement�by�a�ball�ramp�mechanism�and�the�clutch
package�of�the�multidisc�clutch�is�closed�or�opened.
The�contact�pressure�of�the�multidisc�clutch�is�increased�or�reduced�depending�on�the�requested
torque�distribution.�As�a�result,�the�stepped-up�engine�torque�is�steplessly�distributed�between�the
two�rear�wheels�corresponding�to�the�driving�situation.
For�more�information�on�the�rear�axle�differential�with�lock�HAG�215LWS,�refer�to�the�product
information�"G02�complete�vehicle",Regulated�rear�axle�differential�lock.
Oil�change
The�oil�filling�of�the�rear�axle�differential�lock�is�designed�for�the�entire�service�life�of�the�assembly.
BMW�AG�vehicles�with�regulated�rear�axle�differential�lock�are�not�designed�for�use�on�racing�tracks.�If
not�observed,�this�can�lead�to�premature�wear�of�the�rear�axle�differential�lock�and�its�components.�In
the�event�of�a�customer�complaint�"Noises�from�the�rear�axle�differential",�an�oil�change�in�the�rear�axle
differential�must�initially�be�performed�before�replacing�individual�components�or�the�entire�assembly�
Model�overview
The�following�table�provides�you�with�an�overview�of�the�models�in�which�the�rear�axle�differential�with
lock�HAG�215LWS�is�used:
Model Engine Rear�axle�final�drive Transformation�ratio

BMW�X5�xDrive40i B58B30M1 HAG215LWS 3.38:1
BMW�X5�xDrive50i N63B44M3 HAG215LWS 3,15:1
12
7.�Transfer�Box
7.1.�Transfer�box�ATC13-1
The�transfer�box�ATC13-1�is�the�successor�of�the�modular�transfer�box�ATC45L�from�the�F15.
Special�features�of�the�ATC13–1�transfer�box�include:
• Fully�variable�distribution�between�front/rear�axle�is�possible�(100/0%�and�0/100%)
• Demand-based�oil�level�reduction�in�order�to�reduce�splash�losses
• Efficiency�optimized�by�new�oil�line�system.
13
8.�Display/Operating�Concept
8.1.�Oil�level�measurement
G05�display/operating�concept,�oil�level�measurement
Index Explanation
1 Measurement�prerequisites
2 Measurement�is�performed
3 Measurement�ended
The�display/operating�concept�for�the�oil�level�measurement�has�been�reworked.�At�present,�when
an�oil�level�measurement�is�requested,�a�long�text�containing�mixed�information�on�system-specific
measurement�inhibitors�together�with�the�time�required�to�perform�the�measurement�is�displayed.
It�has�been�possible�to�improve�the�measurement�process�by�simplifying�the�presentation�of�inhibit
reasons�and�forecast�time.
14
8.�Display/Operating�Concept
8.2.�Sport�displays
G05�sport�displays
Index Explanation
1 Charging�pressure,�exhaust�turbocharger
2 G-force�(acceleration,�deceleration,�rotation)
3 Engine�torque
4 Engine�performance
5 Engine�oil�temperature
G05�example�of�sport�displays
The�sport�displays�in�the�G05�have�been�reworked�and�redesigned.�The�stresses�on�the�vehicle�vary,
depending�on�the�choice�of�terrain�and�way�in�which�the�vehicle�is�driven.�The�choice�of�displays
relates�to�the�most�important�parameters�for�the�types�of�terrain�on�which�the�vehicle�can�be�driven.
The�charging�pressure,�engine�torque,�engine�output,�engine�oil�temperature�and�g-forces�which
occur�during�acceleration,�deceleration�and�cornering�are�displayed.
15
9.�Chassis�and�Suspension
9.1.�Introduction
The�list�of�highlights�in�the�new�BMW�X5�with�the�development�code�G05�is�extensive.�The�customer
can�enjoy�the�prospect�of�choosing�from�many�different�equipment�packages�that�allow�him�to
configure�his�vehicle�for�sporty�or�off-road�driving.�The�drive�and�chassis�and�suspension�therefore
play�an�important�role�in�customer�satisfaction.
Race�track�operation�and�offroad�driving�with�the�G05
Index Explanation
A Race�track
B Off-road
Different�chassis�and�suspension�packages�are�available.
The�BMW�customer�can�choose�between�a�sporty�chassis�and�suspension�with�steel�springs�and�a
comfortable�air�suspension�with�advanced�customer�functions,�e.g.�for�offroad�driving.
16
Chassis�and�suspension�systems�of�the�G05
Index Explanation
1 Steel�spring�strut
2 Air�suspension�strut
3 Pressure�accumulator
4 Air�supply�unit
9.2.�Chassis�and�suspension�comparison
Component F15 G05
Front�axle Double-wishbone Double-wishbone
Front�suspension Steel Steel�or�air
Front�damping Conventional�or�Electronic Electronic�Damper�Control
Damper�Control�(EDC) (EDC)
Anti-roll�bar,�front Conventional�or�hydraulic Conventional�or�electric�active
active�stabilizer stabilizer�(EARS)
Rear�axle Integral�rear�axle�IV Five-link�rear�suspension
Rear�suspension Steel�or�air Steel�or�air
Rear�damping Conventional�or�Electronic Electronic�Damper�Control
Damper�Control�(EDC) (EDC)
Rear�anti-roll�bar Conventional�or�hydraulic Conventional�or�electric�active
active�stabilizer stabilizer�(EARS)
17
Component F15 G05
Brake�system Dynamic�Stability�Control Integrated�brake�system
(DSC) (DSCi)
Front�brake Brake�discs�up�to�dia.�385�mm Brake�discs�up�to�dia.�395�mm
Rear�brakes Brake�discs�up�to�dia.�345�mm Brake�discs�up�to�dia.�398�mm
Parking�brake Electromechanical�parking Electromechanical�holding
brake�(EMF) brake
Brake�circuit�distribution Black/white Diagonal
Tire�inflation�pressure RDCi�tire�pressure�control RDCi�tire�pressure�control
monitoring
Tire�pressure Information�in�the�B-pillar Electronic�tire�pressures�in�the
CID
Front�steering Electronic�Power�Steering Electronic�Power�Steering
(EPS)�or�hydraulic�active (EPS)�or�Integral�Active
steering Steering
Rear�steering No Rear�axle�slip�angle�control
(HSR)
9.3.�Overview�of�system�descriptions
The�systems�already�familiar�from�other�vehicle�models�will�not�subsequently�be�examined�in�depth�in
this�document.�If�required,�the�detailed�system�descriptions�can�be�found�in�the�product�information
listed�below.
Topic Product�information
Steering G12�Chassis�and�Suspension
Tire�Pressure�Monitor�(RDCi) Tire�Pressure�Monitor�RDCi
Electronic�tire�pressures�label G30�Chassis�and�suspension
Electronic�Damper�Control�(EDC) G12�Chassis�and�Suspension
Electric�Active�Roll�Stabilization�(EARS) G12�Chassis�and�Suspension
18
9.4.�Chassis�and�suspension�packages
Variants Suspension EDC EARS EPS GHAS HSR
Basic -�-�- -�-�- -�-�- -�-�-
M�Sport
Package
(ZPM)
-�-�- -�-�- -�-�-
(Includes
Adaptive�M
Suspension)
Dynamic
Handling
Package
(ZDH)
-�-�-
(Includes
Adaptive�M
Note
Suspension
Professional)
Adaptive
-�-�- -�-�- -�-�-
Comfort
Off-road
Package -�-�- -�-�-
(ZOR)
Note
The�air�suspension�is�not�available�in�combination�with�the�active�stabilizer.
9.4.1.�Abbreviations
Index Explanation
EARS Electric�Active�Roll�Stabilization
EDC Electronic�Damper�Control
EPS Electromechanical�Power�Steering
GHAS Regulated�rear�axle�differential�lock
19
9.4.2.�Basic�chassis�and�suspension
Compared�to�the�predecessor�(F15),�the�standard�chassis�and�suspension�variant�without�optional
equipment�already�offers�regulated�dampers�in�the�basic�version�and�therefore�a�significant
improvement�in�driving�comfort�also�with�significantly�enhanced�BMW-typical�driving�dynamics
characteristics.
In�contrast�to�all�other�chassis�and�suspension�packages,�the�basic�version�of�the�Driving�Experience
Control�does�not�affect�regulation�of�the�Electronic�Damper�Control�(EDC).
9.4.3.�Adaptive�M�suspension�(SA 2VF)
This�chassis�and�suspension�package�offers�modified�suspension�and�damping�characteristics
compared�to�the�basic�chassis�and�suspension�via�the�Driving�Experience�Control.
Influence�of�the�Driving�Experience�Control�on�the�EDC�control
• COMFORT
• SPORT
The�SPORT�driving�mode�offers�a�much�sportier�damping�characteristic�at�the�expense�of�driving
comfort.
9.4.4.�Adaptive�M�suspension�Professional�(SA 2VW)
From�a�functional�standpoint,�this�chassis�and�suspension�package�has�a�particularly�strong�influence
on�the�cornering�behavior�of�the�vehicle.�This�is�achieved�by�using�the�electric�active�roll�stabilization
front�(EARSV)�and�the�electric�active�roll�stabilization�rear�(EARSH).�Both�active�stabilizers�are
adjusted�by�the�vertical�dynamic�platform�(VDP).�The�increase�in�driving�dynamics�is�largely�due�to
a�significant�reduction�in�the�roll�angle�of�the�body�during�cornering�and�a�neutral�drivability�with�low
understeering�tendency.�What�is�notable�about�this�suspension�control�system�is�that�the�increase�in
driving�dynamics�is�not�achieved�in�any�manner�whatsoever�at�the�expense�of�the�driver's�comfort.
9.4.5.�2–axle�Air�Suspension�(SA 2VR)
Due�to�the�two-axle�ride�level�control,�there�are�no�adverse�effects�whatsoever�on�comfort.
The�driving�characteristics�can�be�modified�in�the�usual�manner�via�the�Driving�Experience�Control.
Includes�a�level�change�rocker�button�which�allows�the�customer�to�set�5�different�ride�heights�in�total
from�–40 mm�to�+40 mm.
20
9.4.6.� xOffroad package(SA ZOR)
The�offroad�package�contains�the�2–axle�Air�suspension�(SA 2VR)�and�the�electronically�regulated�rear
axle�differential�lock�(GHAS).
In�addition�to�the�level�change�rocker�button�for�the�air�suspension,�this�chassis�and�suspension
package�also�includes�an�offroad�button.�The�driver�can�select�4�different�offroad�driving�modes�via
the�offroad�button.�This�allows�the�driving�characteristics�to�be�adapted�to�the�local�conditions,�e.g.
snow,�sand,�gravel�or�rock.�Additionally,�a�preconfigured�ride�level�is�set�based�on�the�offroad�mode
selected.�The�resulting�additional�ground�clearance�increases�the�fording�depth�and�offroad�capability
on�challenging�sections,�e.g.�embankments�or�ramps�with�steep�drive-up�angle.
9.5.�xOffroad�package
Overview�of�modifications�to�the�xOffroad�optional�equipment�in�the�G05
Index Explanation
1 Air�suspension�for�more�ground�clearance
2 Modification�of�the�automatic�transmission�shift�strategy�for�offroad�driving
3 xDrive�and�regulated�rear�axle�differential�lock�(GHAS)
4 Offroad�button�for�various�offroad�programs
5 Reinforced�underride�protection
6 xOffroad�camera�for�offroad�driving�(only�with�Parking�Assistant�Plus�5DN)
The�G05�is�the�first�vehicle�in�the�BMW�Group�to�include�optional�equipment�which�is�designed�to
increase�offroad�capability.�The�xOffroad�package�is�available�for�all�vehicle�types.
21
9.5.1.�Operation
Center�Operation�Unit�in�the�G05
Index Explanation
1 Offroad�button�(only�with�xOffroad�optional�equipment)
2 LED�display�of�vehicle�level
3 Level�change�rocker�button�(only�with�optional�equipment�Adaptive�Comfort)
4 Offroad�rocker�button�(only�with�optional�equipment�xOffroad)
5 Hill�Descent�Control
6 Parking�brake�button
7 Automatic�Hold
8 Driving�experience�switch
9 START-STOP�button
The�offroad�button�is�the�offroad�Driving�Experience�Control.�It�supports�the�driver�with�the�assistance
of�various�transmission�modes�in�challenging�terrain.�The�Driving�Experience�Control�for�road�cannot
be�operated�at�the�same�time�as�the�offroad�button.�In�contrast�to�the�level�change�rocker�button�for
the�air�suspension,�the�offroad�rocker�button�not�only�influences�the�vehicle�level,�but�also�the�drive,
chassis�and�suspension�and�assistance�systems.�Once�the�offroad�driving�program�has�been�exited
by�pressing�the�offroad�button�the�last�Driving�Experience�Control�mode�to�be�selected�for�road�is
enabled.
22
The�xOffroad�mode�can�be�activated�as�follows:
• By�actuating�the�offroad�rocker�button
• By�actuating�the�offroad�button.
The�xOffroad�mode�can�be�exited�as�follows:
• By�actuating�the�offroad�button
• By�actuating�the�Driving�Experience�Control.
9.5.2.�Operating�strategy
To�support�the�driver�when�driving�offroad,�4�different�transmission�modes�are�available.�These
can�be�activated�by�pressing�the�offroad�rocker�button.�The�transmission�modes�support�the�driver
through�systematic�adjustment�of�various�drive�and�chassis�and�suspension�systems.�The�vehicle�can
therefore�be�perfectly�tuned�to�the�offroad�conditions.
Operating�strategy�of�xOffroad�chassis�and�suspension�in�the�G05
23
Driving�Mode Application Influence Operation
A –�accelerator�pedal
Snow
xSnow –�shift�strategy.
–�accelerator�pedal
–�shift�strategy
–�higher�degree�of�locking
B
Sand (xDrive/GHAS)
xSand
–�ride�height�(+20 mm)
–�EDC�control
–�DSCi�control.
C –�ride�height�(+20 mm)
Gravel
xGravel –�EDC�control
–�accelerator�pedal
–�shift�strategy
–�higher�degree�of�locking
D
Rock (xDrive/GHAS)
xRocks
–�ride�height�(+40 mm)
–�EDC�control
–�DSCi�control.
Effects�on�the�drive
Offroad�mode Accelerator�pedal Transmission

xSnow Reduced –�lower�shift�speeds
–�soft�gearshifts
xSand Aggressive –�higher�shift�speeds
xGravel Normal -�-�-
xRocks Optimum�modulation –�higher�shift�speeds
24
Effects�on�the�blocks
Offroad�mode xDrive Efficiency�Mode

* GHAS
xSnow -�-�- -�-�- -�-�-

Higher�degree�of
Higher�degree
locking�on�slopes�and
xSand of�locking Deactivated
with�roll�tendency�up
when�cornering
to�10 km/h�(6�mph)
xGravel -�-�- Deactivated -�-�-
Higher�degree�of
Higher�degree
locking�on�slopes�and
xRock of�locking Deactivated
with�roll�tendency�up
when�cornering
to�10 km/h�(6�mph)
*
�The�Efficiency�Mode�was�introduced�in�the�G12�with�the�new�transfer�box�ATC13-1.�In�Efficiency
Mode�the�multidisc�clutch�in�the�transfer�box�is�fully�opened�so�that�no�power�flows�to�the�wheels�of
the�front�axle.�The�lubrication�has�been�further�reduced�which�ensures�that�the�fuel�consumption�is
lower.
The�effects�on�the�control�of�the�xDrive�all-wheel�system�and�control�of�the�regulated�rear�axle
differential�lock�(GHAS)�shown�in�the�table�cannot�be�perceived�by�the�driver.�This�is�a�subtle�pilot
control.�Due�to�the�exceptionally�high�control�speed�of�both�systems,�a�permanently�high�pilot�control
of�the�degree�of�locking�when�offroad�mode�is�activated�is�no�longer�necessary.
Both�systems�also�continuously�regulate�the�adjusted�degree�of�locking�when�offroad�mode�is�not
activated�and�independently�of�the�local�conditions.
Effect�on�the�chassis�and�suspension
Offroad�mode Air�suspension EDC DSCi

xSnow +/–0 mm -�-�- -�-�-
+20 mm Offroad�(soft) Slip�expansion
xSand
at�low�speed
xGravel +20 mm Offroad�(soft) -�-�-
+40 mm Offroad�(soft) Slip�expansion
xRocks
at�low�speed
When�the�speed�threshold�of�30 km/h�(18�mph)�("Rock"�offroad�mode)�or�60 km/h�(37�mph)�("Sand/
Gravel"�offroad�mode)�is�exceeded,�the�ride�height�is�adjusted�with�reference�to�the�lower�drive�level
in�each�case.�When�the�speed�falls�below�the�defined�threshold�again,�the�initial�level�is�automatically
restored�by�raising�the�vehicle.
For�a�detailed�description�of�the�various�ride�heights,�refer�to�the�section�Two-axle�ride�level�control�–>
Operating�strategy.
25
Effect�on�assistance�systems
systems Snow Sand Gravel Rock

Automatic�Start/ Deactivated Deactivated Deactivated Deactivated
Stop
Offroad�camera Activated Activated Activated Activated
Abbreviations
Term Explanation
DSCi Dynamic�Stability�Control�integrated
xDrive All�wheel�drive�system
Automatic�Start/Stop Automatic�engine�start/stop�function
9.5.3.�Displays
x-display�in�the�CID�of�the�G05
26
xOffroad�mode Explanation
xSnow Optimized�setting�for�calmed�drivability�on�smooth�road
Optimized�setting�for�heavy�terrain�with�loose�ground;
xSand
DSC�deactivated�for�maximum�traction
xGravel Optimized�setting�for�light�terrain
Optimized�setting�for�heavy�terrain�with�uneven�ground;
xRocks
DSC�deactivated�for�maximum�traction
A�specially�optimized�display�for�offroad�driving�in�the�Central�Information�Display�(CID)�informs�the
driver�about�the�ground�clearance�of�the�vehicle�and�also�the�roll�tendency,�the�inclination�or�the
downhill�gradient�of�the�offroad�section.
CID�display�of�the�xOffroad�menu�in�the�G05
Index Explanation
1 Vehicle�level
2 Compass
3 xOffroad�view
4 xOffroad�camera
5 Roll�tendency�in�degrees
6 Inclination�and�downhill�gradient�in�percent�and�degrees
The�xOffroad�camera�supports�the�driver�in�narrow�offroad�sections.�This�provides�him�with�a�perfect
all-round�view�of�the�vehicle.
27
xOffroad�camera
xOffroad�camera�view�in�the�G05
The�xOffroad�camera�is�available�in�all�driving�modes.�It�can�be�used�by�the�driver�irrespective�of�the
settings�of�the�Driving�Experience�Control�for�road�or�the�offroad�button.
xOffroad�camera�views�in�the�G05
28
Index Explanation
1 View�of�front�of�vehicle
2 View�of�front�right�wheel
3 View�of�rear�right�wheel
4 View�of�rear�end
5 View�of�rear�left�wheel
6 View�of�front�left�wheel
Speed-dependent�functions�of�the�xOffroad�camera
Speed�range Function
0�–�15 km/h�0�(0�–�10�mph) Freely�selectable�camera�view.
15�–�36 km/h�(10�–�22�mph) Front�camera�is�selected�automatically,�the
other�camera�symbols�are�switched�off.
>�36 km/h�(>�22�mph) xOffroad�camera�not�available.
29
10.�Axles
The�familiar�double-wishbone�front�axle�and�five-link�rear�axle�which�feature�in�other�series�are�used.
10.1.�Front�axle
Double-wishbone�front�axle�in�the�G05
Index Explanation
1 Spring�strut�rest
2 Vibration�absorber
3 Triangle�wishbone,�top
4 Swivel�bearing
5 Wishbone,�bottom
6 Trailing�link
The�modified�geometry�of�the�spring�strut�holder�allows�the�drive�shaft�to�be�easily�accessed.
30
10.�Axles
10.1.1.�Vibration�absorber
The�purpose�of�the�vibration�absorbers�(2)�is�to�compensate�for�the�rolling�noises�of�the�front�wheels.
They�are�used�from�the�following�wheel�size:
19"�wheel�set�with�run-flat�tires.
When�upgrading�the�wheel/�tire�combination�in�vehicles�without�a�vibration�absorber,�it�is�advisable
to�check�the�feasibility�of�retrofitting�the�vibration�absorber.�This�increases�comfort�and�prevents
customer�complaints.
31
11.�Two-axle�Ride�Level�Control
A�newly�developed�air�suspension�which,�in�addition�to�its�efficiency,�offers�many�advanced�customer
functions.
Schematic�representation�of�open�and�closed�air�spring�systems
Index Explanation
A Open�system
B Closed�system
The�air�suspensions�used�up�till�now�at�BMW�were�open�systems.�The�G05�is�the�first�BMW�to�be
equipped�with�a�closed�system.�In�the�closed�system,�continuous�pneumatic�pressure�compensation
does�not�occur�between�the�environment�and�control�system�does�not�take�place�and�instead�takes
place�within�the�control�system�between�the�pressure�accumulator�and�air�suspension�struts.�This
means�the�pneumatic�pressure�generated�by�the�mechanical�compressor�can�be�used�for�several
control�operations.�This�increases�the�efficiency�of�the�system�and�ensures�an�outstanding�degree�of
utilization.
32
11.1.�History
Figure Suspension
E53
steel/steel

steel/air

air/air
E70
steel/steel

steel/air
F15
steel/steel

steel/air
G05
steel/steel

air/air
33
11.2.�Comparison�of�G12�with�G05
Component G12 G05
Twin�axle�air Two-axle�ride�level�control Two-axle�ride�level�control
suspension
Control�unit�for�self- Vertical�Dynamic�Platform�(VDP) Electronic�ride
levelling�suspension height�control�(EHC)
(function�logic)
Channels 3-channel�control 3-channel�control
Drive�level High�level�(+20�mm) Offroad�level�(+40 mm)
Normal�level�(+/–0 mm) High�level�(+20�mm)
Sport�level�(–10 mm) Normal�level�(+/–0 mm)
Dynamic�level�(–10 mm)
Sport�level�(–20 mm)
Load�level�(–40 mm)
Control�options�of�air Ride�height�selection�switch Level�change�rocker�button
suspension Driving�experience�switch Driving�experience�switch
Offroad�button
Offroad�rocker�button
Load�level�button
Display�Key
Shock�absorber EDC�High�two-stage EDC�High�single-stage
11.3.�Structure�and�function
The�main�purpose�of�the�air�suspension�is�to�increase�driving�comfort.�The�system�performs
adjustment�mainly�at�standstill,�e.g.�in�order�to�compensate�for�a�change�in�height�due�to�the�vehicle
load.�The�inertia�of�the�system�means�that�it�cannot�react�to�driving�dynamics�disturbance�variables,
which�may�occur�when�the�vehicle�is�driven�quickly�on�twisting�roads.
11.3.1.�Control�when�driving
Adjustment�is�however�possible�when�driving�with�low�transverse�and�longitudinal�dynamics.
An�adjustment�may�be�triggered�when�driving�for�one�of�the�following�reasons:
• Speed-dependent�driving�level�control
• Driving�level�control�due�to�reduction�in�fuel�level�(change�in�load�status)
• Driving�level�control�due�to�changes�in�the�temperature�of�the�air�in�the�air�suspension�struts
• Manual�adjustment�of�the�driving�level�due�to�customer�request�(e.g.�Driving�Experience
Control�SPORT�mode,�level�change�rocker�button�or�offroad�rocker�button).
34
Overview�of�two-axle�ride�level�control�in�the�G05
Index Explanation
A Air�suspension�strut,�front�left
B Air�suspension�strut,�front�right
C Air�suspension�strut,�rear�right
D Air�suspension�strut,�rear�left
1 Vertical�Dynamic�Platform�(VDP)
2 Power�distribution�box,�rear
3 Control�valve�of�the�Electronic�Damper�Control�(EDC)
4 Ride�height�sensor
6 Air�filter
The�vertical�dynamic�platform�(VDP)�reads�in�the�current�ride�heights�via�4�ride�height�sensors
and�sends�these�to�the�control�unit�for�electronic�ride�height�control�(EHC).�Deviations�between
the�target�and�actual�level�are�calculated�by�the�EHC�control�unit�and�adjusted�if�necessary�via�the
solenoid�valves�inside�the�air�supply�unit.�The�required�air�volume�is�removed�from�or�supplied�to�the
pressure�accumulator.�If�the�pressure�in�the�pressure�accumulator�is�insufficient,�this�is�equalized�by�an
electrical�compressor.�The�compressor�is�controlled�by�the�EHC�control�unit.
35
The�air�suspension�in�the�G05�is�controlled�by�a�3-channel�control�system.�With�this�system,�the�two
air�suspension�struts�of�the�front�axle�are�jointly�controlled�and�the�air�suspension�struts�of�the�rear
axle�are�controlled�separately.�The�aim�of�this�approach�is�to�be�able�to�compensate�for�any�tilting�of
the�vehicle�rear�axle�that�occurs�due�to�uneven�load�conditions.�As�the�load�status�at�the�front�axle
on�the�right�and�left�is�the�same�under�all�operating�conditions,�control�is�effected�in�this�case�via�a
common�channel.�To�do�so,�the�EHC�control�unit�generates�a�mean�value�from�the�two�actual�values
of�the�ride�height�sensors�on�the�front�axle�and�adjusts�the�driving�level�until�the�target�level�and�actual
level�correspond.�The�advantage�of�this�type�of�control�is�that�the�corresponding�driving�level�can�be
approached�without�continuous�readjustment.
To�avoid�dazzling�of�oncoming�traffic,�the�front�axle�is�lowered�first�followed�by�the�rear�axle.�The�axles
are�raised�in�the�reverse�order�(rear�axle�followed�by�front�axle).
To�prevent�water�being�drawn�in,�the�air�intake�hose�has�been�installed�as�high�up�as�possible.�This
has�the�benefit�of�providing�a�good�fording�depth.�An�air�drier�dehumidifies�the�air�drawn�in�to�prevent
corrosion�and�icing�inside�the�pneumatic�system.
11.3.2.�Air�supply�unit
The�air�supply�unit�consists�of�the�electronic�ride�height�control�(EHC)�control�unit,�electrical
compressor�and�a�solenoid�valve�block.
To�prevent�vibrations�being�transferred�to�the�body�when�the�compressor�is�running,�the�holder�of�the
air�supply�unit�is�fastened�to�the�vehicle�by�rubber�elements.
The�air�supply�unit�has�2�separate�ports�for�the�air�intake�and�discharge�hoses.�These�are�however
joined�upstream�of�the�air�filter�via�a�Y-adapter�to�form�one�hose.�The�air�is�therefore�drawn�in�and
released�via�one�hose.
Air�supply�unit�in�the�G05
36
Index Explanation
1 Y-connecting�piece
2 Air�filter
3 Control�unit�for�electronic�ride�height�control�(EHC)
4 E-motor�for�mechanical�compressor
5 Solenoid�valve�block
6 Air�drier
7 Holder
Type�plate
Type�plate�of�air�supply�unit�in�the�G05
Index Explanation
1 Vehicle�manufacturer
2 Data�matrix�code
3 Continental�logo
4 Customer�number
5 Identification�of�manufacturer�(Made�in...)
6 Part�number
37
Index Explanation
7 Trade�mark�supplier�code
8 Day�of�manufacture
9 Year�of�manufacture
10 ATE�trademark
Electrical�compressor
Technical�data
Type�of�current DC
Supply�voltage 12�V
Nominal�voltage 8.5�to�16 V
Maximum�continuous�current 38�A
Maximum�starting�current�(<�200 ms) 60�A
Acoustics 60 dB
Operating�temperature�range –40�to�100 °C�(–40�to�212 °F)
Operating�temperature�range�during�continuous –40�to�80 °C�(–40�to�176 °F)
operation
Short-term�thermal�stability 130 °C�(266 °F)
Storage�temperature�range –40�to�80 °C�(–40�to�176 °F)
Bus�overview
The�electronic�ride�height�control�(EHC)�processes�the�data�for�control�of�the�air�suspension.�This
receives�the�relevant�data,�such�as�the�position�of�the�level�change�rocker�button,�via�the�PT-CAN.
The�EHC�control�unit�controls�the�actuation�of�the�solenoid�valves�and�the�mechanical�compressor
thus�ensuring�implementation�of�the�predefined�ride�heights.
The�information�on�the�current�ride�heights�is�made�available�by�the�vertical�dynamic�platform�(VDP).
38
Bus�overview�of�the�electronic�ride�height�control�(EHC)�in�the�G05
39
Index Explanation
BDC Body�Domain�Controller
EHC Electronic�ride�height�control
VDP Vertical�Dynamic�Platform
The�following�table�shows�the�differences�between�the�air�suspension�control�of�the�G12�and�the�G05:
Air�suspension G12 G05

Control�via�VDP 
Control�via�EHC 
11.3.3.�Pressure�accumulator
A�pressure�accumulator�with�a�volume�of�8 l�is�used�in�the�G05.�The�maximum�filling�pressure�is�15 bar.
This�produces�a�total�filling�volume�of�120 l.
Calculation:�8�l�·�15 bar�:�1 bar�=�120 l
Pressure�accumulator�in�the�G05
Index Explanation
2 Label
3 Compressed�air�line
Pressure�accumulator Data
Volume 8�L
Temperature�range –40�to�100 °C�(–40�to�212 °F)
Bursting�pressure 37,5 bar
Maximum�operating�pressure 15 bar
40
11.3.4.�Air�suspension�strut
The�air�suspension�strut�contains�the�shock�absorber�with�U-type�bellows.�The�U-type�bellows�or
the�shock�absorber�cannot�be�replaced�separately.�All�shock�absorbers�in�the�G05�are�equipped�as
standard�with�an�Electronic�Damper�Control�(EDC)�with�expansion�stage�High.�A�special�feature�of
the�EDC�High�compared�to�EDC�Basic�is�continuous�damper�control�which�is�adapted�to�the�road
conditions.�The�EDC�Basic�on�the�other�hand�does�not�offer�continuous�control�and�instead�a�manual
adjustment�of�the�damper�characteristic�via�the�Driving�Experience�Control.
The�EDC�High�is�available�in�the�following�2�expansion�stages:
• EDC�High�two-stage�(separate�rebound�and�compression�stage�control�G12/G30)
• EDC�High�single-stage�(shared�rebound�and�compression�stage�control�G01/G05).
In�contrast�to�the�G12,�the�G05�is�equipped�with�an�EDC�High�with�a�single-stage�control.�In�this�case,
the�rebound�and�compression�stages�are�controlled�via�a�shared�controller.
Air�suspension�strut�of�the�front�and�rear�axle�in�the�G05
41
Index Explanation
A Front�axle
B Rear�axle
1 Sealing�cap
2 Pot
4 Shock�absorber
5 Control�valve�of�the�Electronic�Damper�Control�(EDC)
6 Pneumatic�connection�with�integrated�residual�pressure�retaining�valve
7 Dust�boot
To�prevent�a�complete�loss�of�pressure�in�the�air�suspension�strut,�a�residual�pressure�retention�valve
is�installed�internally�in�the�pneumatic�connections.�A�residual�pressure�of�2.2�to�3.2 bar�is�thus�held
when�the�compressed�air�lines�are�undone.
The�pneumatic�connections�with�integrated�residual�holding�valve�on�the�air�suspension�strut�cannot
be�replaced�separately.�If�an�attempt�is�made�to�remove�these,�damage�will�occur.�The�entire�air
suspension�strut�will�subsequently�have�to�be�replaced.
Air�suspension�strut Front�axle Rear�axle

Air�volume�in�normal�position 2.1�L 2.3�L
Compression�travel 66�mm 60�mm
Rebound�travel 67�mm 75�mm
Filling�pressure�on�delivery 2.2�to�3.2 bar 2.2�to�3.2 bar
42
11.3.5.�Pneumatic�circuit�diagram
Pneumatic�circuit�diagram�of�the�air�supply�unit�in�the�G05
Index Explanation
AV Discharge�valve
RV1 Control�valve�1
LV1 Air�suspension�strut,�valve�1
M Electric�motor
1 Connection�for�air�discharge�hose
2 Connection�for�air�intake�hose
3 Ventilation�control�unit
4 Connection�for�air�suspension�strut,�rear�left
5 Connection�for�air�suspension�strut,�front�left
6 Connection�for�air�suspension�strut,�rear�right
43
Index Explanation
7 Connection�for�air�suspension�strut,�front�right
8 Pressure�sensor
9 Connection�for�pressure�accumulator
10 Throttle
11 Non-return�valve
12 Pressure-limiting�valve
13 Air�drier
14 Electrical�compressor�(2�pistons)
Filling�the�pressure�accumulator�via�the�compressor
Filling�the�pressure�accumulator�in�the�G05
If�the�quantity�of�air�in�the�system�falls�below�the�minimum,�the�pressure�accumulator�is�filled�with�the
assistance�of�the�electrical�compressor.�To�do�this�the�EHC�control�unit�puts�the�components�of�the�air
supply�unit�listed�below�into�the�corresponding�states�as�specified�in�the�table.
44
Index Explanation Active Inactive
A Intake�pressure – –
B Filling�pressure – –
C Air�suspension�pressure – –
M Compressor 
AV Discharge�valve 
RV1 Control�valve�1 
LV1–LV4 Air�suspension�strut�valves�1–4 
When�the�control�valves�1�and�4�are�activated,�the�filling�pressure�of�the�pressure�accumulator�is
admitted�to�the�pressure�sensor.�Regulation�of�the�pressure�in�the�electrical�compressor�is�therefore
possible.�When�the�corresponding�system�air�quantity�is�reached,�valves�1�and�4�are�closed�and�the
electrical�compressor�is�switched�off.
If�a�very�large�quantity�of�air�is�fed�in,�the�pressure�accumulator�may�be�filled�in�stages.�This�is�required
in�order�to�regenerate�the�dryer�at�regular�intervals.
45
Raising�via�pressure�accumulator�and�compressor
Raising�via�pressure�accumulator�and�compressor�in�the�G05

A Atmospheric�pressure – –
B Accumulator�pressure – –
C Filling�pressure – –
D Air�suspension�pressure – –
M Compressor 
46
During�actual�operation,�the�air�suspension�strut�valves�1–4�are�activated�for�each�axle�in�turn.�The
vehicle�is�not�raised/lowered�via�all�4�air�suspension�struts�at�the�same�time,�as�shown�in�the�previous
graphic.
Raising�via�mechanical�compressor
Raising�via�mechanical�compressor�in�the�G05

A Intake�pressure – –
M Compressor 
47
During�actual�operation,�the�air�suspension�strut�valves�1–4�are�activated�for�each�axle�in�turn.�Raising/
lowering�of�the�vehicle�does�not�take�place�via�all�4�air�suspension�struts�at�the�same�time,�as�shown�in
the�previous�graphic.
Lowering�in�the�pressure�accumulator�with�mechanical�compressor
Lowering�in�the�pressure�accumulator�with�mechanical�compressor

B Filling�pressure – –
M Compressor 
48
To�ensure�the�vehicle�is�lowered�quickly,�the�mechanical�compressor�is�activated�when�lowering�in�the
pressure�accumulator.
During�actual�operation,�the�air�suspension�strut�valves�1–4�are�activated�for�each�axle�in�turn.�Raising/
lowering�of�the�vehicle�does�not�take�place�via�all�4�air�suspension�struts�at�the�same�time,�as�shown�in
the�previous�graphic.
Pressure�measurement�of�the�pressure�accumulator
Pressure�measurement�of�the�pressure�accumulator�in�the�G05
49
M Compressor 
Pressure�measurement,�air�suspension�strut
Pressure�measurement�of�the�air�suspension�strut�in�the�G05
50
M Compressor 
LV1 Air�suspension�strut,�valve�1 
Regeneration,�air�drier
Regeneration�of�the�air�drier�in�the�G05
51
M Compressor 
The�intake�air�is�cleaned�by�the�air�filter�upstream�of�the�compressor�and�dried�by�the�air�drier
downstream�of�the�compressor.�Cleaning�is�necessary�so�that�the�valves�are�protected�against
soiling.�Water�is�extracted�from�the�air�to�prevent�the�valves�from�icing�up�at�low�outside�temperatures.
If�the�valves�were�to�freeze�due�to�excessively�high�air�humidity�in�the�air�supply�system,�the�air
suspension�would�no�longer�be�able�to�perform�the�self-levelling�operation.�To�avoid�this,�the�air�drier�is
permanently�cleaned�or�dewatered.
The�granulate�in�the�air�drier�absorbs�air�humidity�at�high�pressure�and�releases�it�at�low�pressure.�If
the�compressed�air�flows�through�the�granulate�when�filling�the�system,�moisture�is�removed�from�it.
To�regenerate�the�air�drier,�air�is�routed�via�a�throttle�from�the�pressure�accumulator�to�the�air�drier.�The
air�flowing�through�the�air�drier�at�low�pressure�removes�moisture�from�the�granulate�and�releases�it
into�the�atmosphere.
This�permanent�regeneration�of�the�air�drier�ensures�fault-free�operation�of�the�system�without�the
need�for�maintenance�work.
11.4.�Operating�strategy
It�has�been�possible�to�increase�the�maximum�control�range�in�the�G05�to�80 mm.�Starting�from�the
normal�position,�the�customer�can�adjust�the�ride�height�to�between�–40 mm�and�+40 mm,�to�adapt�to
external�conditions.
52
11.4.1.�Control�options
Control�options�for�air�suspension�in�the�G05
Index Explanation
2 Offroad�button�(Driving�Experience�Control�for�optional�equipment�xOffroad)
3 Ride�height�rocker�button�(optional�equipment�2–axle�air�suspension)
4 Load�level�button
5 Display�Key�optional�equipment�3DS�(self-levelling�suspension�function
available�from�12/18)
To�make�it�as�easy�as�possible�for�the�customer�to�adjust�the�ride�heights,�several�control�options�have
been�implemented�in�the�G05.
53
Overview�of�the�various�ride�heights
Level Height�in Speed Operation

Offroad�level +40 Activation�range:
0�to�30 km/h�(0–18�mph)
High�level +20 Activation�range:

0�to�60 km/h�(0–27�mph)
Normal�level +/–0 Vehicle�level�without

button�actuation:
0�to�140 km/h�(0–87�mph)
Vehicle�level,�automatic
lowering:
Dynamic�level –10 –
140�to�200 km/h
(87–124�mph)
Sport�level –20 Activation�via�SPORT
button:
0�up�to�maximum�speed
Automatic�lowering�without
button�actuation:
200�km/h�(124�mph)�up�to
maximum�speed
Load�level –40 Activation�range:
Only�at�standstill
11.4.2.�Control�inhibitors
The�following�vehicle�conditions�prevent�a�change�in�ride�height:
• Brake�test�stand
• Transport�mode
• Stored�speed�thresholds
• Increased�lateral�or�longitudinal�dynamics
• Flat�tire
54
• Non-availability�due�to�component�protection�(component�temperatures�or�pneumatic
pressures�exceeded)
• Low�vehicle�voltage�in�the�residing�condition�(protection�against�starter�operation�if�insufficient
energy�is�available)
• Doors�open
• Electrical�connector�of�trailer�tow�hitch�inserted.
The�control�inhibitors�prevent�damage�to�the�vehicle,�among�other�things,�due�to�incorrect�operation.
At�higher�payloads�with�air�suspension�strut�pressures�of�more�than�9 bar,�the�high�level�is�not�available
due�to�component�protection.
11.4.3.�Speed-dependent�ride�heights
When�driving�without�a�preset�program,�the�vehicle�level�is�adapted�automatically,�depending�on�the
speed.�This�reduces�drag�and�increases�the�driving�dynamics�of�the�G05.�If�the�various�driving�speeds
are�undercut,�the�previous�ride�height�is�set.
Dynamic�level
If�a�driving�speed�of�roughly�140�km/h�(87�mph)�is�exceeded,�the�"Dynamic�level"�(–10 mm)�is�set.�The
"Dynamic�level"�cannot�be�approached�manually�and�the�driver�is�not�notified�about�this�ride�height.
The�following�table�shows�the�control�strategy�(hysteresis)�of�the�dynamic�level.
Speed Time Driving�level

>�160 km/h�(>100�mph) Direct�lowering Dynamic�level�(–10 mm)
140�–�160 km/h�(87–100�mph) >�170�s Dynamic�level�(–10 mm)
<�100�km/h�(<62�mph) Direct�raising Normal�level�(+/–0 mm)
100�–�120 km/h�(62–75�mph) >�20�s Normal�level�(+/–0 mm)
Sport�level
The�"Sport�level"�is�set�above�a�driving�speed�of�200 km/h�(124�mph).�The�Sport�level�can�also�be�set
manually�by�pressing�the�SPORT�Driving�Experience�Control�switch�or�the�ride�height�rocker�button,
irrespective�of�the�speed�(from�0�to�maximum�speed).�The�LED�on�the�ride�height�rocker�button
indicates�which�sport�level�is�activated.
55
Speed-dependent�ride�heights�in�the�G05
Index Explanation
H Ride�height
V Speed
1 Ride�height�rocker�button�at�Sport�level
2 Driving�Experience�Control�in�SPORT�position
3 Automatic�lowering
0�mm Normal�level
-10 mm Dynamic�level
–20 mm Sport�level
11.4.4.�Manually�selectable�ride�heights
The�G05�has�6�different�ride�heights,�5�of�which�can�be�selected�manually.�Only�the�"Dynamic�level"
cannot�be�selected�manually�by�the�driver.�In�addition�to�changing�the�ride�heights,�activation�of�the
"High�and�Offroad�level"�affects�the�power�transmission�of�the�vehicle�(see�description�of�xOffroad
chassis�and�suspension�package).�For�this�reason�the�offroad�button�should�only�be�operated
when�driving�in�suitable�offroad�conditions.�If�the�ride�height�of�the�vehicle�is�to�be�adapted�to�local
conditions,�this�can�be�requested�with�the�assistance�of�the�ride�height�rocker�button.
56
Ride�heights�of�air�suspension�in�the�G05
Index Explanation
H Ride�height
V Speed
1 Offroad�rocker�button�+�ride�height�rocker�button
3 Ride�height�rocker�button�+�SPORT�Driving�Experience�Control
4 Ride�height�rocker�button�+�Load�level�button�+�Display�Key
40�mm Offroad�level
20 mm High�level
+/–0 mm Normal�level
-10 mm Dynamic�level
–40 mm Load�level
57
Load�level
The�load�level�offers�convenient�assistance�when�loading�the�vehicle.�The�load�level�can�be�activated
via�the�following�operating�elements:
• Level�change�rocker�button
• Display�Key
• Load�level�button.
The�load�level�is�only�active�when�the�vehicle�is�stationary.
Exiting�the�speed�range
If�the�driving�level�activated�via�the�ride�height�rocker�button�(e.g.�offroad�level�40 mm)�is�exited�due�to
speed,�the�vehicle�level�is�automatically�adjusted�according�to�the�setting�of�the�Driving�Experience
Control�(normal�level�with�COMFORT�and�sport�level�with�SPORT).�When�the�speed�threshold�is
undercut,�the�height�is�not�raised�again�automatically.
If�the�driving�level�activated�via�the�offroad�button�(e.g.�offroad�level�40 mm)�is�exited�due�to�speed,�the
next�driving�level�down�(high�level�20 mm)�is�automatically�set.�When�the�speed�falls�below�the�defined
threshold�again,�the�vehicle�is�automatically�raised.
Operating�strategy�when�exiting�the�speed�range�in�the�G05
Index Explanation
A Characteristic�of�the�ride�height�when�activated�via�offroad�button
B Characteristic�of�the�ride�height�when�activated�via�ride�height�rocker�button
H Ride�height
V Speed
58
Index Explanation
20 mm High�level
+/–0 mm Normal�level
11.4.5.�Offroad�ride�heights
Two�different�ride�heights�can�be�activated�in�offroad�mode.�When�the�stored�driving�speeds�are
exceeded,�the�next�driving�level�down�is�set.�When�the�speed�falls�below�the�defined�threshold�again,
the�vehicle�is�automatically�raised.
Offroad�ride�heights�in�the�G05
Index Explanation
H Ride�height
V Speed
1 Offroad�button
20 mm High�level
0�mm Normal�level
59
11.4.6.�Water�crossing�detection
The�water�crossing�detection�is�primarily�required�by�the�engine�control�unit�DME.�If�a�water�crossing
is�detected,�the�engine�control�unit�DME�closes�the�air�flaps.�This�reduces�the�danger�of�water�ingress
in�the�intake�area.�As�fluids�cannot�be�compressed,�intake�of�water�would�lead�to�engine�damage.
A�water�crossing�is�detected�via�the�signal�shape�of�the�4�ride�height�sensors.�By�analyzing�the
characteristic�current�and�voltage�curve,�conclusions�can�be�drawn�regarding�a�passage�through
stretch�of�water.
To�avoid�incorrect�adjustments�to�the�air�suspension�during�a�water�crossing,�this�is�deactivated�when
a�water�crossing�is�detected.
Water�crossing�detection�in�the�G05
Index Explanation
3 DME�engine�control�unit
4 Air�damper�control
5 Electronic�ride�height�control�(EHC)
60
When�driving�through�a�body�of�water,�a�small�bow�wave�forms�in�the�front�section.�This�causes
the�vehicle�to�float�slightly.�As�the�wheels�drop�down�when�this�happens,�the�ride�heights�of�the
corresponding�axle�change.�Without�the�water�crossing�detection,�the�air�suspension�would�release
pressure�in�the�air�suspension�strut�in�order�to�adjust�the�ride�height.�This�would�cause�the�vehicle�to
sink�even�lower.
The�engine�control�unit�DME�sends�the�information�regarding�a�water�crossing�to�the�electronic�ride
height�control�(EHC).�The�control�of�the�air�suspension�is�subsequently�deactivated�for�the�duration�of
the�water�crossing.
11.4.7.�Touchdown�detection
The�air�suspension�is�equipped�with�a�touchdown�detection�for�driving�offroad.�This�counteracts�the
reduced�traction�which�occurs�when�several�wheels�lose�contact�with�the�ground.
If�touchdown�is�detected�via�the�ride�heights�accompanied�by�wheel�slip,�the�level�changes�to�a
maximum�ride�height�of�+70 mm.�This�can�lead�to�an�improved�wheel�load�distribution�and�allow�free
travel.�This�is�not�a�driving�level.�When�the�touchdown�detection�is�active,�the�vehicle�level�cannot
be�controlled�manually.�When�a�driving�speed�of�10 km/h�(6�mph)is�exceeded,�the�vehicle�is�lowered
automatically.�The�driver�can�then�access�the�control�of�the�various�vehicle�levels�manually.
Touchdown�detection�of�the�two-axle�ride�level�control�in�the�G05
61
Index Explanation
2 Wheel�without�traction
11.4.8.�Tire�load�removal�function
When�a�flat�tire�is�detected,�the�DSC�control�unit�transfers�this�information�to�the�EHC�control�unit.
The�EHC�control�unit�then�attempts�to�relieve�the�load�on�the�relevant�wheel.�This�can�extend�the
remaining�mileage�of�the�defective�run-flat�tire.�To�achieve�this,�a�tire�load�removal�of�+20�mm�and�–
20 mm�is�set�at�the�rear�axle.�This�results�in�a�total�value�of�40 mm�for�the�differential�level�at�the�rear
axle.
When�a�tire�load�removal�function�is�active,�the�vehicle�is�always�at�the�normal�level.�If�this�is�not
selected�when�the�tire�goes�flat,�it�is�automatically�set.�When�the�tire�unloading�function�is�active,
the�driver�cannot�gain�manual�access�in�order�to�change�the�vehicle�level.
Tire�unloading�function�in�the�G05
Control�of�the�tire�unloading�function
Puncture Rear�left�wheel Rear�right�wheel

Front�left�wheel +20 mm –20 mm
Front�right�wheel –20 mm +20 mm
Rear�left�wheel –20 mm +20 mm
Rear�right�wheel +20 mm –20 mm
62
11.4.9.�Trailer�towing
Trailer�operation�with�G05
Trailer�towing
As�soon�as�a�trailer�is�connected�to�the�vehicle�via�the�trailer�socket,�the�air�suspension�can�no�longer
be�operated,�e.g.�via�the�ride�height�rocker�button.�During�trailer�operation,�the�control�of�the�air
suspension�is�limited�exclusively�to�adjusting�the�load�statuses�at�the�normal�level.
Activating�the�trailer�operation�manually
When�connecting�a�trailer�to�the�vehicle�using�a�trailer�without�a�light�connection�to�the�vehicle,�the
trailer�mode�needs�to�be�activated�manually�in�the
Central�Information�Display�(CID).
Vehicle�settings�for�trailer�operation�in�the�G05
Index Explanation
1 General�settings
2 Vehicle�settings
3 Trailer�towing
63
System�limitations�when�trailer�operation�is�activated
When�trailer�mode�operation�is�activated�manually�or�automatically�when�the�trailer�connection�is
connected�to�the�vehicle,�the�following�system�limitations�exist:
• Opening�of�the�tailgate�via�the�ID�transmitter�or�button�in�the�driver's�door�is�disabled
• Park�Distance�Control�(PDC)�rear�deactivated
• Emergency�braking�function�with�Active�PDC�deactivated
• Level�change�of�air�suspension�disabled
• Lane�change�warning
• Blind�spot�detection
11.5.�Notes�for�Service
11.5.1.�Transport�mode
The�air�suspension�is�in�transport�mode�when�new�vehicles�are�delivered.�A�change�in�the�ride�height
is�not�possible.�Transport�mode�must�be�deleted�using�the�workshop�information�system�ISTA�during
the�pre-delivery�check.�The�different�ride�heights�of�the�air�suspension�can�be�selected�only�after
successful�start-up�of�the�air�suspension�(transport�mode�deleted).
11.5.2.�Vehicle�lift�mode
The�air�suspension�is�equipped�with�a�vehicle�lift�detection�system.�This�prevents�control�action�of�the
air�suspension�when�the�vehicle�is�lifted�in�the�workshop.�To�activate�the�control�of�the�air�suspension
after�exiting�the�vehicle�lift,�the�vehicle�must�be�moved�faster�than�6 km/h�(4�mph).
Vehicle�lift�detection
The�vehicle�lift�detection�is�evaluated�via�the�following�signals:
• Driving�speed
• Height�level,�ride�height�sensor.
When�supporting�the�vehicle,�e.g.�on�a�vehicle�lift,�make�sure�that�the�components�and�lines�of�the�air
suspension�system�are�not�crushed�or�damaged.
11.5.3.�Jack
Before�using�a�jack,�it�is�advisable�to�deactivate�the�self-levelling�suspension�(see�Owner's�Handbook).
64
11.5.4.�Workshop�mode
Activating�the�workshop�mode
The�control�of�the�air�suspension�can�be�deactivated�manually�in�workshop�mode.�This�can�be
activated�by�pressing�the�ride�level�rocker�button�for�longer�than�7�s.�When�doing�so,�whether�the�ride
level�rocker�button�is�pushed�forwards�or�backwards�is�irrelevant.�The�LED�on�the�ride�level�rocker
button�goes�out�to�confirm�workshop�mode.
The�workshop�mode�is�required�for�example�when�performing�a�wheel�alignment�in�order�to�prevent
adjustments�by�the�air�suspension.�BMW�Group�vehicles�equipped�with�a�rear�axle�air�suspension
do�not�feature�a�ride�height�selection�switch.�To�prevent�control�actions�in�these�vehicle�models,�the
vehicle�battery�must�be�disconnected�for�example.
Exiting�workshop�mode
To�activate�the�control�of�the�air�suspension,�the�workshop�mode�must�be�deactivated.
This�can�be�done�as�follows:
• Driving�speed�higher�than�6 km/h�(4�mph)
• Hold�ride�height�rocker�button�pressed�for�longer�than�7�s.
11.5.5.�Swapping�of�air�lines
If�the�compressed�air�lines�are�swapped�round,�the�vehicle�will�tilt�permanently�as�a�result.�It�will�no
longer�be�possible�to�adjust�the�system�when�the�lines�are�swapped.�To�prevent�confusion�during
installation�work�in�service,�the�compressed�air�lines�are�color�coded.
Colour�code Component
Yellow Pressure�accumulator
Black Air�suspension�strut,�front�right
Green Air�suspension�strut,�front�left
Blue Air�suspension�strut,�rear�right
Red Air�suspension�strut,�rear�left
11.5.6.�Servicing�of�the�pneumatic�system
Ensure�strict�cleanliness�around�the�air�spring�connections�during�disassembly�and�installation�work.
Minor�contamination�within�the�lines�may�already�cause�air�suspension�faults.
Before�opening�the�compressed�air�lines,�the�air�spring�system�must�be�depressurised�with�the
assistance�of�the�workshop�information�system�ISTA.
65
Service�function�for�releasing�the�compressed�air�to�the�surroundings
Releasing�the�compressed�air�from�the�air�suspension�struts�to�the�surroundings�in�the�G05

A Atmospheric�pressure — —
B Accumulator�pressure — —
C Filling�pressure — —
D Air�suspension�pressure — —
M Compressor 
66
When�exchanging�the�air�supply�unit,�the�entire�system�must�be�depressurized.�This�is�performed
using�a�service�function�in�the�workshop�information�system�ISTA.�To�prevent�damage�to�the�air
suspension,�a�slight�pressure�of�roughly�2 bar�is�maintained�in�the�air�suspension�struts�via�the�residual
pressure�maintaining�valves.
The�graphic�above�only�shows�the�release�of�compressed�air�from�the�air�suspension�struts.�The
pressure�in�the�pressure�accumulator�is�also�dumped�via�the�service�function.
For�the�valid�procedure�for�exchanging�the�various�components�of�the�air�suspension,�refer�to�the
current�repair�instructions.
Once�an�air�line�has�been�detached,�all�openings�must�be�closed�immediately.�If�dirt�enters�the
pneumatic�system,�this�can�lead�to�faults�or�a�system�failure�the�cause�of�which�can�only�be�diagnosed
with�difficulty.
11.5.7.�Ride�height�adjustment
After�renewing�or�programming�the�Vertical�Dynamic�Platform�(VDP)�control�unit,�the�ride�heights
of�the�two-axle�ride�level�control�must�be�taught�in�again.�This�is�performed�via�the�"ride�height
adjustment"�service�function.�To�do�this,�the�distance�between�the�wheel�arch�and�rim�flange�must�be
measured�with�a�tape�measure�and�entered�in�the�workshop�information�system�ISTA.
Ride�height�adjustment�in�the�G05
Index Explanation
1 Ride�height�of�front�axle
2 Ride�height�of�rear�axle
11.5.8.�Leakages
After�longer�stationary�periods,�the�vehicle�may�reach�a�low�level�due�to�leakage.�To�prevent�damage
due�to�reduced�underbody�clearance,�the�driver�receives�a�corresponding�Check�Control�message.
67
Leakages�are�equalized�as�effectively�as�possible�within�32 h�via�the�wake-up�control.�For�this,�the
vehicle�wakes�up�at�various�time�intervals�and�adjusts�the�ride�height�if�necessary.
Troubleshooting�procedure�if�a�leakage�is�suspected:
• Adjust�and�note�maximum�storage�pressure�of�the�pressure�accumulator�with�assistance�of
workshop�information�system�ISTA
• Deactivate�air�suspension�(workshop�mode)
• Search�for�leak�(check�components�using�leak�detection�spray)
• Determine�storage�pressure�again�after�some�time�and�check�plausibility.
11.5.9.�Display�Key
The�Display�Key�in�the�G05�contains�various�display�menus,�which�depend�on�the�vehicle�equipment.
When�ordering�a�Display�Key�using�the�vehicle�identification�number,�this�is�preconfigured�in�the�BMW
central�warehouse�according�to�the�vehicle�equipment.�Every�vehicle�is�therefore�equipped�with�a�user
menu�which�is�adapted�to�the�equipment�specification.�The�customer�can�use�this�kind�of�menu�to
change�the�vehicle�level�of�his�air�suspension,�for�example.�This�kind�of�menu�is�on�the�other�hand�not
displayed�in�vehicles�without�air�suspension.
Lowering�to�the�load�level�via�the�Display�Key�is�only�possible�from�the�normal�level.
The�function�Change�vehicle�level�via�Display�Key�will�be�available�from�December�2018.
Display�Key�in�the�G05
Raising�or�lowering�to�a�different�driving�level�cannot�be�interrupted.�Be�careful�to�avoid�injury/damage
due�to�entrapment/pinching.
68
11.6.�System�wiring�diagram
System�wiring�diagram�of�the�two-axle�ride�level�control�in�the�G05
69
Index Explanation
1 Vertical�acceleration�sensor,�front�left�(only�in�combination�with�EARS)
2 Ride�height�sensor,�front�left
3 Control�valve�for�Electronic�Damper�Control�(EDC)�front�left
4 Dynamic�Stability�Control�integrated�(DSCi)
5 Control�valve�for�Electronic�Damper�Control�(EDC)�front�right
6 Ride�height�sensor,�front�right
7 Vertical�acceleration�sensor,�front�right�(only�in�combination�with�EARS)
8 Power�distribution�box,�front
11 Vertical�acceleration�sensor,�rear�right�(only�in�combination�with�EARS)
12 Ride�height�sensor,�rear�right
13 Control�valve�for�Electronic�Damper�Control�(EDC)�rear�right
16 Load�level�button
17 Tailgate�release�button
18 Control�valve�for�Electronic�Damper�Control�(EDC)�rear�left
19 Ride-height�sensor,�rear�left
20 Vertical�acceleration�sensor,�rear�left�(only�in�combination�with�EARS)
21 Center�Operation�Unit
22 Advanced�Crash�Safety�Module�(ACSM)
24 CAN�terminator
70
12.�Brakes
The�G05�is�the�first�BMW�Group�vehicle�to�be�equipped�with�a�newly�developed�integrated�brake
system.�The�core�element�of�the�brake�is�the�Dynamic�Stability�Control�integrated DSCi.�What�sets
this�brake�system�apart�from�the�others�is�the�omission�of�vacuum�supply�and�brake�servo.�This�is�an
electro-hydraulic brake-by-wire�brake�system�which�determines�the�braking�requirement�of�the�driver
and�adjusts�the�hydraulic�brake�pressure�accordingly.�During�normal�operation�the�driver�has�no�direct
connection�in�the�brake�hydraulics�to�the�wheel�brakes.�A�brake�force�simulator�generates�a�familiar
brake�pedal�feel.�Feedback�from�the�brake�hydraulics�that�typically�occurs�during�ABS�or�DSC�control
operations,�are�not�perceived�by�the�driver.
Overview�of�integrated�brake�system�in�the�G05/
Index Explanation
1 Brake�fluid�expansion�tank
3 Automatic�Hold
71
12.�Brakes
Index Explanation
5 Combined�brake�caliper
6 Rear�brakes
7 Electromechanical�parking�brake�actuator
8 Pedal�bracket
9 Brake�caliper,�front
10 Front�brake
12.1.�Service�brake
12.1.1.�Variants
Depending�on�the�engine�size�and�vehicle�equipment,�various�brake�calipers�are�used�at�the�front�and
rear�axle.�In�the�area�of�the�19"�brake,�the�blue�painted�sport�brake�is�only�available�in�combination�with
the�optional�equipment�M�Sprt�Brakes�(OE�2NH).
Front�axle
Brake�caliper�variants�for�front�axle�in�the�G05
Index Explanation Manufacturer

A Standard�brake�(17”�disc) Continental
®
B Optional�brake�(18”�disc) Brembo
®
C M�Sport�brake�(19”�disc) Brembo
®
72
12.�Brakes
Rear�axle
Brake�caliper�variants�for�rear�axle�in�the�G05
Index Explanation Manufacturer

A Standard�brake�(17”�disc)�(18” TRW
®
disc)
B M�Sport�brake�(19”�disc) TRW
®
12.1.2.�Brake�discs
All�G05�versions�contain�a�riveted�lightweight�construction�brake�disc.�The�weight�reduction�is
achieved�by�using�a�brake�disc�chamber�made�of�aluminium.
Brake�discs�installed�in�the�G05
Index Explanation
A Two-part�lightweight�construction�brake�disc,�dismantled�view
(cannot�be�dismantled�in�service)
B Two-part�lightweight�construction�brake�disc,�assembled�view
1 Friction�surface
2 Brake�disc�chamber
73
12.�Brakes
Only�the�complete�brake�disc�can�be�renewed�in�service.�Separation�of�the�rivets�is�not�permitted.
12.2.�Parking�brake
The�electromechanical�parking�brake�used�up�till�now�in�the�BMW�X5�will�be�replaced�with�an
electromechanical�parking�brake�upon�introduction�of�the�G05.
Holding�brake�systems�in�the�F15�and�G05
Index Explanation
A F15�with�electromechanical�parking�brake
B G05�with�electromechanical�parking�brake
1 Duo-servo�parking�brake
3 Emergency�release
6 Combined�brake�caliper
74
13.�Wheels�and�Tires
The�wheel�sizes�of�the�G05�range�from�19�x�9.5�with�265/50-R19�tires�to�22�x�10.5�with�315/30-R22
tires.�Wheel�sizes�19",�20"�and�21"�are�available�with�mixed�tires�as�an�option.
There�should�be�no�significant�deviation�between�the�tread�depth�or�tire�rolling�circumference�of�the
wheels�of�the�front�axle�and�wheels�of�the�rear�axle�in�vehicles�equipped�with�the�xDrive�all-wheel
system.
13.1.�Run�flat�tire
Run-flat�tires�are�available�for�the�following�wheel/tire�combinations.
Variable Characteristics Tire�type Tire�size

19" All-season Run�flat�tire 265/50�R19
20" All-season Run�flat�tire 275/45�R20
21" Performance Run�flat�tire 275/40�R21
315/35�R21
22" Performance Run�flat�tire 275/35�R21
315/30�R21
13.1.1.�Puncture
Continued�driving�with�depressurized�run-flat�tires�with�medium�load�is�permitted�up�to�a�maximum
speed�of�80 km/h�(50�mph)�for�roughly�80 km�(50�miles).
Wheel�load�removal
The�wheel�load�removal�function�is�used�in�the�following�systems�to�extend�the�range�of�the�run-flat
tires�in�the�event�of�a�flat�tire:
• Electric�active�roll�stabilization�EARS
• Two-axle�ride�level�control.
A�damaged�run-flat�tire�can�be�also�replaced�in�emergencies�with�a�normal�tire�which�should�then�be
replaced�as�soon�as�possible�with�a�run-flat�tire.
75
13.2.�Offroad�tires
Offroad�tires�in�the�G05
Index Explanation
1 Offroad�tires�with�special�grabber�AT3�tire�tread
2 Offroad�wheel�rims�style�748M�matt�black�9 x 20
1/2 Wheel�with�tire
Customers�with�offroad�requirements�can�now�for�the�first�time�obtain�a�special�wheel�set�from�BMW
to�increase�offroad�capability.�The�wheel�set�cannot�be�ordered�from�the�factory�but�only�available
through�Aftersales.�It�has�the�characteristics�of�an�all-season�tire�and�can�therefore�be�used�by�the
customer�not�only�for�offroad�driving�but�also�as�a�fully-fledged�winter�tire�set.�The�special�grabber�AT3
tire�tread�offers�the�perfect�combination�of�offroad�capability�and�good�drivability�on�the�road.
13.2.1.�Technical�data
The�grabber�AT3�tire�has�the�following�identification�marks:
• Mud�and�Snow�(M+S)
• Three-Peak-Snowflake.
It�is�therefore�a�fully-fledged�winter�tire.
The�offroad�tire�has�no�star�identification.�Following�extensive�testing�by�the�wheel�and�tire
development�division�however,�it�has�been�possible�to�provide�a�marketing�recommendation.�The
assistance�systems�available�from�BMW�can�also�be�used�without�restriction�in�combination�with�the
offroad�wheel�set.
76
Tire�size Speed�range Noise�emission
275/45�R20 H�rated�(up�to�130�mph) 73 dB/2
13.2.2.�Grabber�AT3�tire�tread
Traction�on�every�surface
Due�to�the�large�number�of�gripping�edges�in�the�tire�tread,�the�tire�interlocks�with�the�loose�surface
and�effectively�transmits�the�drive�and�brake�forces.
The�open�tread�shoulder�ensures�efficient�self-cleaning�and�additional�traction�in�mud.
Protective�functions
Sidewall�lugs Deflection�ribs Rim�protection�rib
Solid�blocks�running�from�the�tire�shoulder�into�the�side�wall�protect�this�area�from�lateral�damage�by
stones,�rocks�and�rubble.
The�deflection�ribs�attached�to�the�sides�repel�foreign�bodies�and�therefore�prevent�foreign�bodies
from�penetrating�the�upper�side�wall�area.
The�rim�protection�rib�protects�the�tire�and�wheel�rim�in�the�bead�area�from�damage�by�curbs�and
obstacles�during�offroad�use.
13.3.�Integrated�RDCi�tire�pressure�monitor
The�G05�is�equipped�with�the�familiar�tire�pressure�monitor�RDCi�which�is�integrated�into�the�Dynamic
®
Stability�Control.�The�TPM�wheel�electronics�of�the�RDCi�in�the�G05�are�provided�by�Sensata .
77
Vehicle Wheel�electronics
G12 Schrader
®
G30 Schrader
®
G05 Sensata
®
G15 Sensata
®
13.3.1.�Electronic�tire�pressures�label
The�G05�is�equipped�with�the�electronic�tire�pressure�specification�introduced�in�the�G30
(BMW�5�Series).�For�the�valid�tire�inflation�pressures,�check�the�Central�Information�Display�(CID).
The�RDC�reset�is�omitted�following�adjustment�of�the�tire�inflation�pressures�in�vehicles�with�activated
electronic�tire�pressure�specification.
Further�information�can�be�found�in�the�"G30�Complete�Vehicle"�product�information.
13.4.�Wheel�bolts
Two-part�wheel�bolts�in�the�G05
Index Explanation
1 Wheel�bolt
2 Centering�cone
The�two-part�wheel�bolts�guarantee�high�preload�forces.
78
14.�Driving�Stability�Control
14.1.�Bus�overview
Bus�overview�of�the�driving�dynamics�systems�in�the�G05
79
Index Explanation
ACSM Advanced�Crash�Safety�Module
EARSH Electric�active�roll�stabilization�rear
EARSV Electric�active�roll�stabilization�front
HSR Rear�axle�slip�angle�control
SAS Optional�equipment�system
VIP Virtual�Integration�Platform
VTG Transfer�box
14.2.�Steering
An�electromechanical�power�steering�with�parallel-axis�arrangement�(EPS-APA)�is�used.�A�rear�axle
steering�in�the�equipment�specification�"Integral�Active�Steering"�can�now�be�ordered�in�an�X�model
for�the�first�time�at�BMW.�In�contrast�to�previous�vehicles�equipped�with�Integral�Active�Steering,�a
24 V�system�is�not�used�with�the�G05.�All�vehicles�are�supplied�with�12 V�steering.
80
Overview�of�steering�in�the�G05
Index Explanation
1 Electromechanical�Power�Steering
1a Conventional�rack�geometry�(standard�steering)
1b Variable�rack�geometry�(Integral�Active�Steering)
2 Rear�axle�slip�angle�control�HSR�(Integral�Active�Steering)
14.2.1.�Rear�axle�slip�angle�control�HSR
The�maximum�steering�angle�of�the�rear�axle�slip�angle�control�HSR�in�the�G05�is�2.5°.
14.3.�Dynamic�Stability�Control�integrated�DSCi
The�G05�features�the�newly�developed�integrated�brake�system�with�internal�designation�Dynamic
Stability�Control�integrated�DSCi.
81
With�the�introduction�of�the�DSCi,�a�completely�new�braking�concept�is�available�to�BMW�customers
which�has�a�significant�effect�on�driving�dynamics.
14.3.1.�Features
The�brake�system�is�distinguished�by�the�following�driving�characteristics�in�particular:
• Outstanding�driving�dynamics�and�vehicle�control�due�to�the�dynamics�and�precision�of�the
vehicle�stabilization.
• More�sporting�character�and�feeling�of�safety�due�to�a�brake�pedal�feel�short�travel�and
effective�modulation.
• Enhanced�active�safety�thanks�to�shorter�stopping�distances�in�combination�with�assistance
systems.
• Due�to�the�fast�pressure�build-up,�much�faster�and�more�precise�interventions�can�be�achieved
compared�to�previous�brake�systems.
82
Dynamic�Stability�Control�integrated�DSCi�in�the�G05
Index Explanation
1 Brake�control�linkage�with�adjustable�ball�head
2 Expansion�tank
3 Brake�fluid�level�sensor
4 Plug�connection,�power�supply�(DC)
5 Plug�connection,�electrical�system
6 Control�unit
83
Index Explanation
7 Hydraulic�unit
8 Brake�pedal�force�simulator
9 3-phase�e-motor�(AC)
10 DSCi�unit
The�new�DSCi�brake�system�in�the�G05�is�characterized�by�the�following�special�technical
features:
• Electro-hydraulic�brake-by-wire�braking�function
• Vacuum�supply�omitted
• Vacuum�brake�servo�omitted
• Integration�of�the�tandem�brake�master�cylinder
• Integrated�brake�pedal�travel�sensor
• Changeover�from�front/back�to�diagonal�brake�force�distribution
• Changeover�from�a�brake�fluid�level�switch�to�a�brake�fluid�level�sensor.
The�following�document�provides�a�detailed�description�of�the�integrated�brake:
Product�information�DSCi.
14.3.3.�Brake�functions
Function Explanation
Antilock�Brake Prevents�locking�of�individual�wheels�when�braking�by�means�of�targeted
System�(ABS) modulation�of�brake�pressures.�Vehicle�steerability�is�maintained.
Cornering�Brake Prevents�the�vehicle�from�turning�in�when�braking�gently�and�when
Control�(CBC) subjected�to�a�high�degree�of�lateral�acceleration�by�adjusting�the�control�of
the�brake�pressures.�The�cornering�stability�is�improved.
Automatic�Stability Prevents�the�drive�wheels�from�spinning�by�targeted�braking�of�these
Control�(ASC) wheels�and�adaptation�of�the�drive�torque�delivered�by�the�engine.�Vehicle
propulsion�is�optimized�as�a�result�and�driving�stability�is�maintained.
Dynamic�Brake In�the�event�of�panic�braking�initiated�by�the�driver,�the�system�supports�the
Control�(DBC) driver�by�automatically�immediately�applying�the�maximum�brake�pressure
to�ensure�the�best�possible�deceleration.
Dynamic�Stability If�the�vehicle�starts�to�understeer�or�oversteer,�it�is�stabilized�by�targeted
Control�(DSC) brake�interventions�at�individual�wheels.
84
Function Explanation
Automatic Simulates�the�function�of�the�differential�lock.�If�a�wheel�displays�a
Differential�Brake tendency�to�spin,�this�wheel�is�automatically�braked�so�that�forward
(ADB-X) momentum�can�still�be�achieved�via�the�other�wheel�of�the�driven�axle.
Dynamic�Traction Represents�a�special�mode�of�the�Dynamic�Stability�Control�integrated
Control�(DTC) DSCi.
Brake�standby Builds�up�a�moderate�brake�pressure�in�the�system�when�the�driver�takes
his�foot�off�the�accelerator�pedal�quickly.�The�braking�effect�then�acts�more
quickly�if�the�driver�then�performs�panic�braking.
Dry�by�applying Depending�on�whether�the�wiper�is�switched�on,�applies�the�brake�pads
brake gently�at�intervals�in�order�to�clean�(dry)�the�brake�discs.�The�braking�effect
is�significantly�improved�by�this�when�the�vehicle�is�braked.
Drive-off�assistant Holds�the�vehicle�on�inclines�for�roughly�1.5�seconds�as�soon�as�the�driver
releases�the�brake�pedal�in�order�to�drive�off.�This�means�that�the�driver
can�drive�off�comfortably,�without�the�vehicle�rolling�back�down�the�hill
unintentionally.
Automatic�Hold Automatically�holds�the�vehicle�after�it�has�come�to�a�standstill�without�it
being�necessary�to�still�press�the�brake�when�the�drive�position�is�selected.
The�brake�is�automatically�released�when�the�accelerator�pedal�is�pressed
and�the�vehicle�drives�off�normally.�The�function�can�be�switched�on�and�off
by�means�of�a�button.
85
14.3.4.�System�wiring�diagram
System�wiring�diagram�of�DSCi�in�the�G05
86
Index Explanation
1 Wheel-speed�sensor,�front�left
2 Brake�fluid�level�sensor
3 Wheel-speed�sensor,�front�right
4 Power�distribution�box,�engine�compartment
5 Power�distribution�box,�front
7 Center�Operation�Unit
8 Wheel�speed�sensor,�rear�right
9 Brake�pad�wear�indicator,�rear�right
10 Parking�brake�actuator,�right
11 Parking�brake�actuator,�left
12 Wheel�speed�sensor,�rear�left
14 Steering�column�switch�cluster�(SZL)
15 Instrument�cluster�(KOMBI)
16 CAN�terminator
with�virtual�integration�platform�(VIP)
18 Brake�pad�wear�indicator,�front�left
14.4.�Vehicle�dynamics�functions
Agility�and System Description
manoeuvrability
Dynamic�driving –�HSR Through�a�systematic�steering�wheel�movement,�the�agility
rear�axle�steering and�manoeuvrability�in�the�low�speed�range�can�be�improved
by�countersteering�the�wheels�of�the�rear�axle.�By�aligning�the
rear�axle�wheels�in�the�same�direction�at�high�driving�speeds
increases�the�driving�stability.
Driving�dynamic –�EPS The�limit�range�response�influences�the�steering�torques�to�be
limit�range applied�by�the�driver�so�that�the�transition�from�stable�driving�to
response oversteer�or�understeer�situations�is�better�perceived.
87
Stabilization System Description
and�traction
Cornering –�EARS Selective�influencing�of�the�rolling�moment�relationship
Steering between�front�and�rear�axles�can�produce�a�stabilizing�or�more
Behavior dynamic�characteristic�in�the�vehicle's�self-steering�response.
Cornering –�EARS Influencing�the�rolling�moment�relationships�between�front�and
Traction�Control rear�axle�is�used�to�improve�the�traction�when�cornering.
Yaw-rate�control, –�HSR Systematic�steering�wheel�movements�of�the�rear�axle�in
rear�axle oversteering�and�understeering�situations�stabilizes�the
vehicle.
Yaw�moment –�HSR The�yaw�movement�of�the�vehicle�arising�under�heavy�and
compensation, varying�braking�coefficients�of�friction�between�the�left-hand
rear�axle and�right-hand�sides�of�the�vehicle�is�compensated�for�by
selective�steering�movements�on�the�rear�axle.
Yaw�moment –�EPS Targeted�steering�moment�interventions�by�the�Electronic
compensation, Power�Steering�EPS�in�the�event�of�heavy�braking�with�different
front�axle coefficients�of�friction�between�the�left�and�right�vehicle�sides
provide�the�driver�with�information�about�the�steering�input
required�to�compensate�for�developing�yaw�movement�of�the
vehicle.
Performance –�DSCi The�tendency�of�the�vehicle�to�oversteer�or�understeer�is
Control reduced�by�selective�brake�interventions�on�individual�wheels.
At�the�same�time,�the�vehicle�deceleration�caused�by�the�brake
intervention�is�furthermore�compensated�for�by�increasing�the
engine�torque.
Driving�dynamic –�DME Regulating�the�drive�torque�within�limits�on�the�basis�of�the
total�drive�torque estimated�coefficient�of�friction�to�avoid�uncomfortable�jumps
intervention during�ASC�control.
Transverse –�DSCi The�QMVH�function�controls�the�torque�shift�between�the�drive
torque –�GHAS wheels�of�the�rear�axle,�depending�on�the�driving�situation,�in
distribution,�rear order�to�improve�agility�and�stability.
axle
Longitudinal –�DSCi The�function�distributes�the�drive�torque�between�the�front�and
torque –�VTG rear�axle�according�to�requirements�in�order�to�improve�driving
distribution dynamics,�driving�stability,�agility�and�traction.
88
14.4.1.�Abbreviations
Abbreviation Explanation
DME Digital�Motor�Electronics
EARS Electric�active�stabilizer
VTG Transfer�box
89
G05�General�Vehicle�Electronics
BMW�Service
Symbols�used
Contents
1. Introduction............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 1
2. Bus� Systems..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................2
2.1. Bus�overview................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 2
2.2. Main�bus�systems................................................................................................................................................................................................. 4
2.2.1. K-CAN.................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4
2.2.2. PT-CAN................................................................................................................................................................................................ 5
2.2.3. FlexRay.................................................................................................................................................................................................. 6
2.2.4. Ethernet............................................................................................................................................................................................... 7
2.2.5. D-CAN................................................................................................................................................................................................10
2.3. Sub-bus�systems...............................................................................................................................................................................................10
2.3.1. LIN�bus............................................................................................................................................................................................. 10
2.3.2. Local�CAN....................................................................................................................................................................................22
2.3.3. USB........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 23
3. Control�Units.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 24
3.1. Installation�locations�of�control�units................................................................................................................................. 24
3.2. Gateway............................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 26
3.2.1. Body�Domain�Controller�(BDC)................................................................................................................. 26
3.3. Control�units�on�the�Ethernet........................................................................................................................................................ 29
3.3.1. Head�unit....................................................................................................................................................................................... 29
3.3.2. Receiver�Audio�Module�(RAM)................................................................................................................. 29
3.3.3. Booster............................................................................................................................................................................................. 30
3.3.4. Top�Rear�Side�View�Camera�(TRSVC)............................................................................................ 31
3.3.5. Camera-based�driver�assistance�systems�(KAFAS).................................................. 32
3.3.6. Front�radar�sensor�(FRS)..................................................................................................................................... 33
3.3.7. Front�radar�sensor�long�range�(FRSF)............................................................................................ 33
3.3.8. Optional�equipment�system�(SAS).......................................................................................................34
3.4. Control�units�on�the�K-CAN2.........................................................................................................................................................35
3.4.1. Trailer�module�(AHM).................................................................................................................................................35
3.4.2. Roof�function�center�(FZD)...............................................................................................................................36
3.4.3. Tailgate�function�module�(HKFM).......................................................................................................... 37
3.4.4. Seat�modules......................................................................................................................................................................... 37
3.4.5. Seat�pneumatics�modules................................................................................................................................. 38
3.5.1. Frontal�Light�Electronics...................................................................................................................................... 39
3.5.2. Parking�Manoeuvring�Assistant�(PMA).......................................................................................... 40
3.5.3. HRSNR�lane�change�warning�(SWW)� ............................................................................................ 41
3.6.1. Controller�(CON)................................................................................................................................................................42
3.6.2. Integrated�automatic�heating/air�conditioning�(IHKA)............................................. 42
Contents
3.6.3. Telematic�Communication�Box�(TCB�2).......................................................................................43
3.7.1. Remote�control�receiver�(FBD)................................................................................................................... 44
3.7.2. Near�Field�Communication�(NFC)�with�wireless�charging�station
(WCA).................................................................................................................................................................................................. 44
3.8. Control�units�on�the�Ethernet........................................................................................................................................................ 45
3.8.1. Active�Cruise�Control�(ACC)........................................................................................................................... 45
3.8.2. Rear�view�camera�(RFK)........................................................................................................................................ 46
3.9. Control�units�on�the�PT-CAN......................................................................................................................................................... 46
3.9.1. Digital�Motor�Electronics�(DME)...............................................................................................................46
3.9.2. Instrument�cluster�(KOMBI)............................................................................................................................. 47
3.9.3. Night�vision�electronics�(NVE)..................................................................................................................... 47
3.10. Control�units�on�the�PT-CAN2.................................................................................................................................................... 48
3.10.1. Electronic�transmission�control�(EGS)............................................................................................ 48
3.10.2. Gear�selector�switch�(GWS)............................................................................................................................ 48
3.10.3. Power�Control�Unit�(PCU).................................................................................................................................. 49
3.11. Control�units�on�the�FlexRay.......................................................................................................................................................... 50
3.11.1. Advanced�Crash�Safety�Module�(ACSM)................................................................................... 50
3.11.2. Dynamic�Stability�Control�(DSCi)............................................................................................................50
3.11.3. Electric�active�roll�stabilization.................................................................................................................... 51
3.11.4. Electronic�Power�Steering�(EPS)............................................................................................................ 52
3.11.5. Rear�axle�slip�angle�control�(HSR)......................................................................................................... 52
3.11.6. Transfer�box.............................................................................................................................................................................. 53
3.11.7. Vertical�Dynamic�Platform�(VDP)............................................................................................................. 53
3.12. Control�units�on�the�local�CAN................................................................................................................................................... 54
3.12.1. Front�radar�sensor,�short-range�sensor.........................................................................................54
4. Voltage�Supply............................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 55
4.1. Overview�of�voltage�supply............................................................................................................................................................... 55
4.1.1. System�wiring�diagram,�version�1..........................................................................................................55
4.1.2. Dual�storage�system,�system�wiring�diagram,�version�2..................................... 57
4.2. Components.............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 59
4.2.1. Overview�of�luggage�compartment..................................................................................................... 59
4.2.2. Overview�of�engine�compartment......................................................................................................... 60
4.2.3. Battery............................................................................................................................................................................................... 61
4.2.4. Intelligent�battery�sensor..................................................................................................................................... 61
4.2.5. Safety�battery�terminal............................................................................................................................................ 62
4.2.6. AGLR�alternator.................................................................................................................................................................. 62
4.2.7. Integrated�supply�module................................................................................................................................... 63
4.2.8. Power�distribution�box,�front�right......................................................................................................... 63
Contents
4.2.9. Power�distribution�box,�front�left............................................................................................................. 64
4.2.10. Power�distribution�box,�rear............................................................................................................................ 64
4.2.11. Body�Domain�Controller....................................................................................................................................... 65
4.2.12. PCU�with�vehicle�electrical�system�assistance�measure................................... 65
5. Terminal�Control........................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 67
5.1. Introduction................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 67
5.2. Vehicle�conditions............................................................................................................................................................................................ 67
5.3. Power�supply�terminals........................................................................................................................................................................... 71
5.4. Partial�network�operation...................................................................................................................................................................... 72
5.4.1. Prerequisites�for�partial�network�operation............................................................................. 72
5.4.2. Prerequisites�of�control�units�for�partial�network�operation...........................72
6. Exterior�Lighting........................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 73
6.1. Versions.............................................................................................................................................................................................................................73
6.2. Front�exterior�lights........................................................................................................................................................................................ 73
6.2.2. Adaptive�Full�LED�headlights....................................................................................................................... 75
6.2.3. BMW�laserlight.....................................................................................................................................................................76
6.3. Rear�exterior�lights.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 77
6.3.2. Rear�light........................................................................................................................................................................................79
6.4. KAFAS................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 80
6.5. Ground�lighting......................................................................................................................................................................................................81
6.6. Light�carpet................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 81
6.7. Trailer�lighting.......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 81
7. Wash/Wipe�System............................................................................................................................................................................................................... 84
8. Alarm�System.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 86
9. Power�Window�Regulator......................................................................................................................................................................................... 88
10. Electric�Steering�Column.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 90
11. Interior�Lighting.......................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 92
Contents
11.1. Ambient�lighting.................................................................................................................................................................................................. 92
11.2. Speaker�illumination......................................................................................................................................................................................95
12. Door� Mirror...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................98

12.1. Exterior�mirror�High........................................................................................................................................................................................98
13. Seats........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 100

13.1. Front�seats............................................................................................................................................................................................................... 100
13.1.1. Memory�sports�seat,�driver's�side,�front..................................................................................100
13.1.2. Multi-contour�seat,�front.................................................................................................................................. 102
13.2. Electric�seats,�rear�passenger�compartment.................................................................................................... 104
13.2.1. Electric�seats�with�seat�heating,�rear�passenger�compartment.......... 104
13.3. Massage....................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 106
13.3.1. Seat�massage,�both�front�seats........................................................................................................... 107
14. Panorama�Roof......................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 109

14.1. System�wiring�diagram......................................................................................................................................................................... 109
15. Steering�Column�Switch�Cluster............................................................................................................................................................ 111

15.2. SZL....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 112
16. Locking�and�Security�Functions............................................................................................................................................................. 113

16.1. Comfort�Access�2.0................................................................................................................................................................................. 113
16.1.1. System�wiring�diagram....................................................................................................................................... 113
16.2. Central�locking�system......................................................................................................................................................................... 116
16.2.2. Function...................................................................................................................................................................................... 118
16.3. Upper�section�of�tailgate................................................................................................................................................................... 119
16.4. Tailgate�lower�section............................................................................................................................................................................ 121
16.5. Automatic�Soft�Close�system....................................................................................................................................................123
17. Interior�Mirror............................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 125

18. Passive�Safety�System..............................................................................................................................................................................................126
Contents
18.1. System�overview............................................................................................................................................................................................ 126
18.1.1. System�wiring�diagrams....................................................................................................................................126
18.2. Functions................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 132
18.2.1. System�monitoring�functions................................................................................................................... 132
18.3. System�components............................................................................................................................................................................... 133
18.3.1. Advanced�Crash�Safety�Module.......................................................................................................... 133
18.3.2. Sensors�and�switches.......................................................................................................................................... 133
18.3.3. Actuators................................................................................................................................................................................... 139
1.�Introduction
The�Service�Pack�2018�vehicle�electrical�system�is�used�in�the�G05.�The�technology�and�the�design�of
the�2018�vehicle�electrical�system�is�described�in�the�Product�Information�"ST1856�General�Vehicle
Electronics�2018",�as�in�also�features�in�other�BMW�Group�vehicles.�Adaptations�and�changes�to
the�vehicle�electrical�system�and�also�be�found�in�the�Product�Information�"ST1856�General�Vehicle
Electronics�2018".
1
2.�Bus�Systems
Bus�overview
2
2.�Bus�Systems
Index Explanation
AHM Trailer�module
Booster Hi-fi�booster
CON Controller
DME2 Digital�Engine�Electronics�2
DSC Dynamic�Stability�Control
DCS Driver�Camera�System
EGS Electronic�transmission�control
FBD Remote�control�receiver
FLER Frontal�Light�Electronics�Right
FLEL Frontal�Light�Electronics�Left
FRS Front�radar�sensor
FRSF Front�radar�sensor�long�range
FZD Roof�function�center
GWS Gear�selector�switch
HKFM Tailgate�function�module
HRSNL Rear�radar�sensor�short�range�left
HRSNR Rear�radar�sensor�short�range�right
HEADUNIT Head�Unit
IHKA Integrated�automatic�heating/air�conditioning
KAFAS Camera-based�driver�assistance�systems
KOMBI Instrument�cluster
NFC Near�Field�Communication
NVE Night�Vision�Electronics
PCU Power�Control�Unit
PMA Parking�Manoeuvring�Assistant
RAM Receiver�Audio�Module
3
2.�Bus�Systems
Index Explanation
RFK Rear�view�camera
RSE Rear�Seat�Entertainment
SMBF Front�passenger�seat�module
SMFA Driver's�seat�module
SMBFH Seat�module,�front�passenger's�side,�rear
SMFAH Seat�module,�driver's�side,�rear
SPNMVL Seat�pneumatics�module�front�left
SPNMVR Seat�pneumatics�module�front�right
SRSNVL Side�radar�sensor�short�range�front�right
SRSNVR Side�radar�sensor�short�range�front�left
TCB Telematic�Communication�Box
TRSVC Top�rear�side�view�camera
VTG Transfer�box
WCA Wireless�charging�station
ZGM Central�Gateway�Module
1 Start-up�node�control�units�for�starting�and�synchronizing�the�FlexRay�bus
system
2 Control�units�authorized�to�perform�wake-up�function
3 Control�units�also�connected�at�terminal�15WUP
2.2.�Main�bus�systems
2.2.1.�K-CAN
A�number�of�K-CAN�bus�systems�are�used�in�the�G05.
K-CAN�bus�systems:
• K-CAN2
• K-CAN3
• K-CAN4
• K-CAN5
• K-CAN6
4
2.�Bus�Systems
The�control�units�on�the�K-CAN5�are�not�displayed�in�the�bus�overview�by�the�BMW�diagnosis�system.
Diagnosis�is�performed�via�the�Body�Domain�Controller.
All�K-CAN�data�buses�have�a�data�transfer�rate�of�500 kBit/s.
2.2.2.�PT-CAN
Two�versions�of�the�PT-CAN�are�used�in�the�G05.
PT-CAN�bus�systems:
• PT-CAN
• PT-CAN2
The�gateway�for�the�PT-CAN2�is�located�in�the�DME.
Both�PT-CAN�data�buses�have�a�data�transfer�rate�of�500 kBit/s.
5
2.�Bus�Systems
2.2.3.�FlexRay
FlexRay�overview
6
2.�Bus�Systems
Index Explanation
1 Digital�Motor�Electronics�(DME1)�(only�8-cylinder�engine)
3 Regulated�rear�axle�differential�lock�(GHAS)
4 Electric�active�roll�stabilization�rear�(EARSH)
5 Rear�axle�slip�angle�control�(HSR)
8 Optional�equipment�system�(SAS)
9 Dynamic�Stability�Control�(DSC)
10 Electronic�Power�Steering�(electromechanical�power�steering)�(EPS)
11 Digital�Motor�Electronics�(DME1)�(only�6-cylinder�engine)
12 Electric�active�roll�stabilization�front�(EARSV)
13 Digital�Motor�Electronics�(DME2)�(only�8-cylinder�engines)
The�FlexRay�overview�includes�all�engine�versions�and�optional�equipment.�The�DME1(no.�1)�is
present�for�6-cylinder�engines.�On�8-cylinder�engines�the�DME2�(no.�13)�and�DME1�(no.�1)�are
present.�The�terminating�resistors�for�line�termination�are�located�in�the�control�units�and�in�the�Body
Domain�Controller.
The�FlexRay�has�a�data�transfer�rate�of�10 MBit/s.
2.2.4.�Ethernet
Two�different�Ethernet�versions�of�the�are�used.�Thus,�in�the�G05,�the�variant�with�5 lines�(4 data�lines
and�1 activation�line)�is�used�for�the�OBD2�interface�to�the�Body�Domain�Controller.�Diagnosis�and
programming�of�the�connected�control�units�are�performed�via�the�Ethernet.
The�second�variant�is�already�familiar�from�the�G12�and�is�used�as�2-wire�OABR�Ethernet�(Open
Alliance�BroadR-Reach).
Control�units�on�the�2-wire�OABR�Ethernet:
• Camera-based�driver�assistance�systems�(KAFAS)
• Top�Rear�Side�View�Camera�(TRSVC)
• Head�Unit�High�(HU-H)
• Rear�Seat�Entertainment�(RSE)
• Optional�equipment�system�(SAS)
• Telematic�Communication�Box�2�(TCB2)
• Receiver�Audio�Module�(RAM)
• Front�radar�sensor�long�range�(FRSF).
7
2.�Bus�Systems
The�standard�"Open�Alliance�BroadR-Reach"�(OABR�Ethernet)�has�been�specially�developed�as�a�new
data�transmission�layer�for�use�in�vehicles.�OABR�Ethernet�only�requires�an�unshielded�twisted�two-
wire�connection.�OABR�Ethernet�supports�bidirectional�100 MBit/s�communication�between�2�nodes.
This�means�that�both�nodes�can�simultaneously�send�and�receive�at�a�data�transfer�rate�of�100 MBit/
s.�OABR�Ethernet�requires�point-to-point�networking.�This�means�that�the�bus�system�is�not�split�up
between�multiple�nodes,�as�is�the�case�e.g.�with�the�CAN�(Controller�Area�Network).�Instead,�Ethernet
switches�are�used�for�the�connection�of�further�nodes.�Today,�Ethernet�switches�are�integrated�in�the
following�control�units:�Body�Domain�Controller�(BDC),�head�unit�(HU),�optional�equipment�system
(SAS),�top�rear�side�view�camera�(TRSVC).
A�wake-up�line�may�be�required�for�control�units�that�are�only�connected�to�the�Ethernet�and�are�not
additionally�connected�to�a�K-CAN.
Control�units�on�the�Ethernet�cannot�be�woken�up�via�the�bus.�Instead,�the�control�units�are�activated
via�the�wake-up�line�or�switched�directly�via�terminal�15.
8
2.�Bus�Systems
System�wiring�diagram,�Ethernet
Ethernet�topology
9
2.�Bus�Systems
Index Explanation
1 Front�radar�sensor�long�range�(FRSF)
2 Front�camera
3 Camera-based�driver�assistance�systems
5 Exterior�mirror�camera,�right
6 Rear�view�camera�(RFK)�(single�camera�without�KAFAS)
7 Rear�view�camera
8 Booster
9 Receiver�Audio�Module�(RAM)
10 Telematic�Communication�Box�(TCB)
11 Rear�Seat�Entertainment�(RSE)
12 Exterior�mirror�camera,�left
13 Head�Unit�High�(HU-H)
15 Driver�Camera�System�(DCS)
16 Top�Rear�Side�View�Camera�(TRSVC)
2.2.5.�D-CAN
The�D-CAN�is�still�needed�for�control�units�which�do�not�have�an�Ethernet�connection�for�diagnosis.
The�D-CAN�has�a�data�transfer�rate�of�500 kBit/s.
Diagnosis�and�programming�of�the�connected�control�units�are�performed�via�the�D-CAN.
2.3.�Sub-bus�systems
The�sub-bus�systems�on�the�one�hand�relieve�the�load�on�the�main�bus�systems�and�on�the�other�hand
do�not�require�a�high�data�transfer�rate.
2.3.1.�LIN�bus
For�a�better�overview,�the�LIN�buses�are�divided�up�between�several�wiring�diagrams�for�the�G05.
10
2.�Bus�Systems
LIN�bus�in�the�area�of�the�doors
LIN�bus�overview�in�the�area�of�the�doors
11
2.�Bus�Systems
Index Explanation
2 Exterior�mirror,�front�passenger�side
3 Memory�seat,�front�passenger's�side
4 Power�window�electronics,�passenger's�side�front
5 Power�window�electronics,�passenger’s�side�rear
6 Non-contact�tailgate�opening
7 Power�window�electronics,�driver’s�side�rear
8 Power�window�electronics,�driver's�side�front
9 Memory�switch,�driver’s�side�front
10 Switch�block,�driver's�door
11 Exterior�mirror,�driver's�side
12
2.�Bus�Systems
LIN�bus�for�engine�electrical�system�and�voltage�supply
LIN�bus�overview�for�engine�electrical�system�and�voltage�supply
13
2.�Bus�Systems
Index Explanation
1 Air�damper�control
2 Electric�fan
4 Power�Control�Unit�(PCU)�500 W
6 Intelligent�Battery�Sensor�(IBS)
7 Alternator
8 Digital�Motor�Electronics�(DME)
14
2.�Bus�Systems
LIN�bus�for�roof�function�center
LIN�bus�overview�for�roof�function�center
15
2.�Bus�Systems
Index Explanation
1 Rain‐light‐solar-condensation�sensor
2 Inside�mirror
3 Roof�function�center�(FZD)
5 Sliding�roofliner�motor
6 Interior�lighting,�rear
7 Siren�with�tilt�alarm�sensor�(SINE)
16
2.�Bus�Systems
LIN�bus�for�steering�column�switch�cluster�and�operating�units
LIN�bus�overview�for�steering�column�switch�cluster�and�operating�units
17
2.�Bus�Systems
Index Explanation
1 Wiper�motor
3 Operating�unit,�center�console
4 Audio�operating�facility
5 Hazard�warning�switch/Intelligent�Safety�button
6 Touch�detection�(Hands-Off�Detection)
7 Steering�wheel�module
8 Multifunction�steering�wheel�buttons,�right
9 Steering�column�adjustment
11 Operating�unit�for�light
LIN�bus�for�integrated�automatic�heating/air�conditioning�system
The�LIN�bus�overview�shows�the�integrated�automatic�heating/air�conditioning�system�(IHKA)�with�the
maximum�possible�LIN�bus�components.�Depending�on�the�version�of�the�IHKA,�any�components�not
required�are�omitted.
18
2.�Bus�Systems
LIN�bus�overview�for�integrated�automatic�heating/air�conditioning�system
19
2.�Bus�Systems
Index Explanation
1 Auxiliary�heating
2 Air�freshener�(not�for�US)
3 Ioniser�(not�for�US)
4 Blower�motor
6 Operating�unit,�rear�passenger�compartment
7 Stepper�motor�for�blending�flap,�right�rear�passenger�compartment
8 Stepper�motor�for�blending�flap,�left�rear�passenger�compartment
9 Stepper�motor�for�blending�flap,�right
10 Stepper�motor�for�blending�flap,�left
11 Stepper�motor�for�air�distribution,�right�rear�passenger�compartment
12 Stepper�motor�for�air�distribution,�left�rear�passenger�compartment
13 Stepper�motor�for�footwell,�right
14 Stepper�motor�for�footwell,�left
15 Stepper�motor�for�stratification,�right
16 Stepper�motor�for�stratification,�left
17 Stepper�motor�for�ventilation,�right
18 Stepper�motor�for�ventilation,�left
19 Stepper�motor�for�defrost�function
20 Stepper�motor�for�air�recirculation�function
21 Stepper�motor�for�fresh�air
22 Electric�auxiliary�heater
23 Operating�unit,�air�conditioning
24 Touch�control�box�in�the�center�grille
25 Integrated�automatic�heating/air�conditioning�(IHKA)
20
2.�Bus�Systems
LIN�bus�for�ambient�lighting
LIN�bus�overview�for�ambient�lighting
21
2.�Bus�Systems
Index Explanation
2 Driver's�seat,�lighting,�backrest,�left
3 Driver's�seat,�lighting,�backrest,�bottom�left
4 Front�passenger�seat,�lighting,�backrest,�left
5 Front�passenger�seat,�lighting,�backrest,�bottom�left
6 Contour�line�lighting,�instrument�panel,�passenger's�side,�bottom�right
7 Contour�line�lighting,�instrument�panel,�passenger's�side,�middle�right
8 Contour�line�lighting,�instrument�panel,�passenger's�side,�top�right
9 Contour�line�lighting,�instrument�panel,�driver's�side,�top�left
10 Contour�line�lighting,�instrument�panel,�driver's�side,�bottom�left
11 Sky�Lounge�panorama�roof�lighting,�rear�left
13 Sky�Lounge�panorama�roof�lighting,�rear�right
15 Sky�Lounge�panorama�roof�lighting,�front�right
16 Sky�Lounge�panorama�roof�lighting,�front�left
2.3.2.�Local�CAN
The�local�CAN�is�often�used�if�two�control�units�are�to�be�directly�connected�to�each�other.
Up�to�4�different�connections�can�be�used,�depending�on�the�vehicle�equipment.
Local�CAN�connections:
• Electronic�transmission�control�(EGS)�to�gear�selector�switch�(GWS).
• Camera-based�driver�assistance�system�(KAFAS)�to�front�radar�sensor.
• Optional�equipment�system�(SAS)�to�side�radar�sensor�short�range�front�right�and�left.
• Optional�equipment�system�(SAS)�to�rear�radar�sensor�short�range�right�and�left.
The�control�units�on�the�local�CAN�are�not�displayed�in�the�bus�overview�by�the�BMW�diagnosis
system.�Diagnosis�takes�place�via�the�corresponding�primary�control�unit.
The�local�CAN�has�a�data�transfer�rate�of�500 kBit/s.
22
2.�Bus�Systems
2.3.3.�USB
Different�USB�interfaces�are�provided�in�the�G05�depending�on�the�vehicle�equipment.
USB�interfaces:
• Type�A�in�the�center�console.
• Type�C�in�the�center�armrest.
• Type�C�charging�only�2�x�in�the�backrests.
• Type�C�2�x�in�the�Rear�Seat�Entertainment�control�panel�(from�11/18).
A�charge�current�of�max.�1.5 A�is�available�via�the�USB�port�in�the�center�console.
A�charge�current�of�max.�3 A�is�available�via�the�USB�port�in�the�center�armrest�and�via�all�the�other
USB�ports�in�the�rear�passenger�compartment.
Detailed�information�on�USB�interfaces�can�be�found�in�the�Product�Information�G05�Infotainment�and
Infotainment�2018.
23
3.�Control�Units
3.1.�Installation�locations�of�control�units
G05�Installation�locations�of�control�units
Index Explanation
1 Rear�radar�sensor�short�range�left�(HRSNL)
3 Booster
4 Electric�active�roll�stabilization�rear�(EARSH)
5 Telematic�Communication�Box�(TCB)
6 Rear�axle�slip�angle�control�(HSR)
7 Regulated�rear�axle�differential�lock�(GHAS)
8 Driver's�seat�module,�rear�(SMFAH)
9 Seat�pneumatics�module�front�left�(SPNMVL)
10 Driver's�seat�module (SMFA)
24
Index Explanation
13 Camera-based�driver�assistance�systems�(KAFAS)
16 Control�unit�for�rear�view�camera�and�SideView�(TRSVC)
17 Dynamic�Stability�Control�(DSC/VIP)
18 Wireless�charging�station�(WCA/NFC)
20 Side�radar�sensor�short�range�front�left�(SRSNVL)
21 Frontal�Light�Electronics�Left�(FLEL)
22 Electric�active�roll�stabilization�front�(EARSV)
23 Front�radar�sensor�(FRS)/Front�radar�sensor�long�range�(FRSF)
24 Side�radar�sensor�short�range�front�right�(SRSNVR)
25 Frontal�Light�Electronics�Right�(FLER)
26 Digital�Engine�Electronics�2�(DME2)
27 Electronic�Power�Steering�(EPS)
28 Body�Domain�Controller�(BDC)/Central�Gateway�Module�(ZGM)
29 Night�vision�electronics�NVE
31 Electronic�transmission�control�(EGS)
32 Head�unit�(HU-H)
34 Front�passenger�seat�module�(SMBF)
35 Transfer�box
36 Seat�pneumatics�module�front�right�(SPNMVR)
37 Controller�(CON)/Gear�selector�switch�(GWS)
38 Rear�Seat�Entertainment�(RSE)
39 Seat�module,�passenger's�side�rear�(SMBFH)
40 Remote�control�receiver�(FBD)
42 Parking�Manoeuvring�Assistant�(PMA)
43 Power�Control�Unit�(PCU)
44 Rear�radar�sensor�short�range�right�(HRSNR)
25
Index Explanation
45 Tailgate�function�module�(HKFM)
46 Trailer�module�(AHM)
47 Selective�Catalytic�Reduction�(SCR)�(not�for�US)
48 Rear�view�camera�(RFK)
3.2.�Gateway
3.2.1.�Body�Domain�Controller�(BDC)
Body�Domain�Controller�(BDC)
BDC�functions:
• Gateway
• Electronic�immobilizer
• Terminal�control
• Central�locking�system
• Exterior�lights
• Power�windows
• Horn
• Interior�light
26
• Wash/wipe�system
• Vehicle�data�storage
• Data�transfer�for�Condition�Based�Service�(CBS).
Fuses�in�the�BDC
• Audio�operating�facility
• Operating�facility�for�assist�systems
• Operating�unit�for�light
• Power�windows
• Heated�rear�window
• Tailgate�function�module
• Integrated�automatic�heating/air�conditioning
• OBD2�interface
• Power�Control�Unit
• Rain‐light‐solar-condensation�sensor
• Steering�column�switch�cluster
• Telematic�Communication�Box
• Outside�door�handle�electronics
• Vertical�Dynamic�Platform�(electronics)
• Central�locking�system.
Relay�in�the�BDC
• Terminal�30F
• Power�window�regulator
• Central�locking�system
• Heated�rear�window
Gateway�in�the�BDC
The�central�gateway�module�(ZGM)�is�integrated�in�the�BDC.�It�is�viewed�as�a�control�unit�within�a
control�unit.�The�task�of�the�central�gateway�module�is�to�connect�all�the�main�bus�systems�to�each
other.�By�connecting�them�in�this�way,�it�is�possible�to�use�information�from�the�individual�bus�systems
on�a�generalized�level.�The�central�gateway�module�is�able�to�implement�different�protocols�and
speeds�on�other�bus�systems.�The�programming�data�for�the�control�units�is�transmitted�by�Ethernet
to�the�vehicle�via�the�ZGM.
The�BDC�is�the�gateway�for�many�components�on�the�LIN�bus.
27
LIN�bus�components:
• Exterior�mirror,�left�and�right
• Switch�block,�driver's�door,�front�passenger�door
• Steering�column�switch�cluster
• Light�switch
• Intelligent�Safety�button
• Audio�operating�facility
• Inside�mirror
• Rain‐light‐solar-condensation�sensor
• Roof�function�center�(interior�lighting)
• Comfort�seat,�rear�passenger�compartment,�left�and�right
• Electric�steering�column�adjustment
• Wiper
• Operating�unit,�center�console
• Power�distribution�box,�rear.
Wake-up�function�in�the�BDC:
• Battery�charging�unit
• Intelligent�battery�sensor
• Electric�fan
• Active�air�flap�control
• Digital�Motor�Electronics.
The�BDC�assumes�only�the�wake-up�function�for�the�control�units�listed�under�wake-up�function.
The�primary�and�gateway�function�remains�with�the�engine�control.
28
3.3.�Control�units�on�the�Ethernet
3.3.1.�Head�unit
Head�unit
On�the�G05,�the�head�unit�can�be�operated�by�touch�at�the�CID�in�addition�to�operation�via�the
controller.�In�the�case�of�optional�equipment�with�BMW�gesture�control,�selected�functions�can�also�be
operated�by�means�of�gestures.
3.3.2.�Receiver�Audio�Module�(RAM)
The�Receiver�Audio�Module�(RAM)�is�a�control�unit�and�part�of�the�infotainment�system.�The�Receiver
Audio�Module�(RAM)�is�an�audio�amplifier�with�integrated�tuners�and�an�integrated�sound�processor.
The�Receiver�Audio�Module�(RAM)�also�contains�Active�Sound�Design�(ASD),�and�therefore�an
additional�control�unit�is�not�required.
29
Receiver�Audio�Module�(RAM)
The�Receiver�Audio�Module�(RAM)�comes�in�a�variety�of�versions�and�power�levels.
Versions�and�power�levels:
• RAM�BASIC
• RAM�MID
• RAM�HIGH
Depending�on�the�number�and�power�of�the�speakers,�a�booster,�to�which�the�audio�data�are�streamed
via�an�Ethernet�connection,�is�additionally�installed.
3.3.3.�Booster
An�additional�booster�is�installed,�depending�on�the�audio�variant.�Normally�there�is�no�booster
for�stereo�and�hi-fi.�However,�if�an�outside�speaker�is�required�for�the�outside�sound�on�a�vehicle,
depending�on�the�engine�version,�a�booster�is�installed.�For�"Harman�Kardon�Surround�Sound�system"
and�"Bowers�&�Wilkins�Diamond�Surround�Sound�system"�(SA�6F1)�the�corresponding�booster�is
installed.
30
Booster�variants
Index Explanation
1 Booster�for�Harman�Kardon�Surround�Sound�system
2 Booster�for�Bowers�&�Wilkins�Diamond�Surround�Sound�system
The�booster�is�available�in�different�versions�and�power�levels,�depending�on�the�audio�variant.
The�power�output�stages�for�the�corresponding�speakers�are�located�in�the�booster.
The�booster�is�connected�via�Ethernet�to�the�Receiver�Audio�Module�(RAM).
3.3.4.�Top�Rear�Side�View�Camera�(TRSVC)
Installation�location,�Top�Rear�Side�View�Camera�(TRSVC)
The�Top�Rear�Side�View�Camera�control�unit�receives�the�picture�information�from�the�cameras�in
order�to�show�the�"bird's-eye�view".
31
Connected�cameras:
• Front�camera
• Exterior�mirror�camera,�left
• Exterior�mirror�camera,�right
• Rear�view�camera
The�cameras�are�connected�to�the�TRSVC�via�Ethernet.
3.3.5.�Camera-based�driver�assistance�systems�(KAFAS)
Installation�location,�camera-based�driver�assistance�systems�(KAFAS)
The�highest�expansion�stage�of�the�camera-based�driver�assistance�systems�(KAFAS)
contains�6�assistance�functions.
Available�assistance�functions:
• Active�Cruse�Control�with�Stop&Go�function
• Traffic�Jam�Assistant
• Speed�Limit�Information
• Collision�Warning
• Daytime�Pedestrian�Protection
• Frontal�Collision�Warning�with�City�Collision�Mitigation.
32
3.3.6.�Front�radar�sensor�(FRS)
Installation�location,�front�radar�sensor�(FRS)
The�front�radar�sensor�(FRS)�supplies�the�input�data�for:
• Collision�Warning
• Daytime�Pedestrian�and�Cyclist�Protection
• Dynamic�Cruise�Control�with�braking�function
• Active�Cruse�Control�with�Stop&Go�function
3.3.7.�Front�radar�sensor�long�range�(FRSF)
Front�radar�sensor�long�range�(FRSF)
33
The�front�radar�sensor�long�range�(FRSF)�is�installed�with�the�optional�equipment
Driving�Assistant�Professional.
3.3.8.�Optional�equipment�system�(SAS)
Optional�equipment�system�(SAS)
The�optional�equipment�system�(SAS)�control�unit�provides�a�variety�of�driver�assistance�functions.
The�SAS�does�not�have�any�installed�sensors.�The�information�needed�for�the�functions�is�made
available�by�the�corresponding�control�units�and�sensors.�The�SAS�activates�the�control�units
necessary�for�the�corresponding�function.
Possible�functions:
• Collision�warning�with�city�braking�function
• Dynamic�Brake�Control
• Person�recognition�with�city�braking�function
• Parking�Manoeuvring�Assistant
• Extended�Traffic�Jam�Assist
• Camera-based�cruise�control�with�Stop&Go�function
• Proactive�driving�assistant
• Steering�and�lane�control�assistant�including�traffic�jam�assistant
• Lane�change�warning
• Collision�warning�with�city�braking�function
• Distance�information
• Dynamic�Cruise�Control�with�braking�function
• Speed�limit
34
• Lane�departure�warning
• Crossing�traffic�warning
• Speed�Limit�Assist
The�image�information�required�by�the�optional�equipment�system�is�provided�by�the�camera-based
driver�support�systems.
3.4.�Control�units�on�the�K-CAN2
3.4.1.�Trailer�module�(AHM)
Trailer�module�(AHM)
The�trailer�module�is�responsible�for:
• Supply�and�control�for�the�trailer�lighting
35
3.4.2.�Roof�function�center�(FZD)
Roof�function�center�(FZD)
Depending�on�the�vehicle�equipment�the�roof�function�center�FZD�includes�the�corresponding
components�for:
• Alarm�system
• Control,�slide/tilt�sunroof
• Gesture�recognition�camera
• Emergency�call�button.
On�vehicles�with�BMW�gesture�control�the�gesture�recognition�camera�is�installed�in�the�FZD.�The
gesture�recognition�camera�is�not�shown�as�a�control�unit�by�the�BMW�diagnosis�system.�Diagnosis
takes�place�via�the�FZD.�The�gesture�recognition�camera�is�connected�to�the�PT-CAN4.�As�a�result,
the�bus�signals�do�not�have�to�be�forwarded�to�another�CAN�bus�by�the�Body�Domain�Controller.
The�FZD�is�not�responsible�for�the�control�of�the�interior�light.�The�interior�light�unit�and�the�FZD
electronics�are�located�in�the�same�housing.
36
3.4.3.�Tailgate�function�module�(HKFM)
Tailgate�function�module�(HKFM)
The�control�unit�for�the�tailgate�function�module�(HKFM)�is�responsible�for�control�of�the�tailgate�lift.
3.4.4.�Seat�modules
Seat�module
The�following�seat�modules�are�present�corresponding�to�the�vehicle�equipment:
• Driver's�seat�module (SMFA)
• Front�passenger�seat�module�(SMBF)
37
The�seat�modules�are�responsible�for�actuation�of�the�servomotors�in�the�corresponding�seat.
Depending�on�the�equipment,�there�may�be�2�identical�seat�modules�installed�in�the�vehicle.�Encoding
of�the�control�units�takes�place�by�connection�to�the�wiring�harness.�The�control�unit�is�assigned
correspondingly�in�the�vehicle�depending�on�the�additional�ground�encoding.
3.4.5.�Seat�pneumatics�modules
Seat�pneumatics�module�back�right�(SPNMHR)
The�following�seat�pneumatics�modules�are�present�corresponding�to�the�vehicle�equipment:
• Seat�pneumatics�module�front�left�(SPNMVL)
• Seat�pneumatics�module�front�right�(SPNMVR)
The�seat�pneumatics�modules�are�responsible�for�the�massage�function�in�the�corresponding�seat.
Depending�on�the�equipment,�there�may�be�2�identical�seat�pneumatics�modules�installed�in�the
vehicle.�Encoding�of�the�control�units�takes�place�by�connection�to�the�wiring�harness.�The�control�unit
is�assigned�correspondingly�in�the�vehicle�depending�on�the�additional�ground�encoding.
38
3.5.1.�Frontal�Light�Electronics
Frontal�Light�Electronics�Right�and�Left
The�control�units�Frontal�Light�Electronics�Right�(FLER)�and�Frontal�Light�Electronics�Left�(FLEL)�are
installed�in�the�corresponding�headlight.
The�Frontal�Light�Electronics�includes:
• LED�activation�in�the�corresponding�headlight
• Activation�of�the�turn�indicators
• Activation�of�the�stepper�motor�for�the�headlight�beam�throw�adjustment
• Actuation�of�the�fans
39
3.5.2.�Parking�Manoeuvring�Assistant�(PMA)
Parking�Manoeuvring�Assistant�(PMA)
The�PMA�control�unit�performs�the�corresponding�functions,�depending�on�equipment:
• Park�Distance�Control�(PDC)
• Park�Assistant
• Parking�Manoeuvring�Assistant�Plus.
Park�Distance�Control�(PDC)�assists�the�driver�when�manoeuvring�in�and�out�of�a�parking�space.
The�current�distance�from�an�obstruction�is�indicated�by�acoustic�signals�and�on�a�visual�display.
The�Parking�Manoeuvring�Assistant�performs�parking�in�parking�spaces.
40
3.5.3.�HRSNR�lane�change�warning�(SWW)
Lane�change�warning�(SWW)
Both�lane�change�warning�HRSNL�left�and�HRSNR�right�control�units�are�shown�in�the�graphic.�The
rear�radar�sensor�short�range�right�(HRSNR)�is�a�further�development�of�lane�change�warning�(SWW).
Both�control�units�can�now�be�read�out�individually�by�way�of�diagnosis�with�the�BMW�diagnosis
system.
• Driving�Assistant�(SA�5AT)
The�SWW�primary�control�unit�is�the�HRSNR�and�it�is�also�used�for�diagnosis�of�the�additional�control
units�connected�to�the�local�CAN.�The�lane�change�warning�HRSNL�(secondary)�control�unit�is
required�for�the�lane�change�warning.
The�following�control�units�are�additionally�required�for�the�optional�equipment�Driving�Assistant�Plus:
• Radar�sensor,�front�left
• Radar�sensor,�front�right
41
3.6.1.�Controller�(CON)
Controller�(CON)
On�the�G05�a�controller�with�a�touchpad�is�used.
3.6.2.�Integrated�automatic�heating/air�conditioning�(IHKA)
The�integrated�automatic�heating/air�conditioning�system�(IHKA)�is�standard�equipment�in�the�G05.
42
3.6.3.�Telematic�Communication�Box�(TCB�2)
Telematic�Communication�Box�(TCB�2)
The�2nd-generation�Telematic�Communication�Box�(TCB)�is�installed�in�the�G05.�The�Telematic
Communication�Box�(TCB�2)�is�connected�directly�to�the�roof-mounted�aerial�and�is�responsible�for�the
following�functions:
• BMW�ConnectedDrive�services�(incl.�BMW�Assist�with�eCall�(emergency�call�function))�+
BMW�Online
• BMW�Internet�using�a�SIM�card�integrated�in�the�vehicle�(P-SIM)
• Remote�functions�(reception�and�controller)
• "Speech-to-text"�function�in�Office�area
• BMW�Teleservices�via�P-SIM
• WLAN�hotspot�via�P-SIM.
43
3.7.1.�Remote�control�receiver�(FBD)
Remote�control�receiver
The�control�unit�remote�control�receiver�FBD�is�responsible�for�communication�of�the�remote�control
services.�It�receives�the�data�of�the�wheel�electronics�for�the�tire�pressure�control.
The�control�unit�for�the�remote�control�service�is�not�shown�in�the�bus�overview�by�the�BMW�diagnosis
system�ISTA.�Diagnosis�is�performed�via�the�Body�Domain�Controller.
3.7.2.�Near�Field�Communication�(NFC)�with�wireless�charging�station�(WCA)
NFC�with�WCA
In�the�G05�the�WCA�is�installed�in�the�center�stack�storage�compartment.
44
The�control�unit�Near�Field�Communication�NFC�is�required�for�Near�Field�Communication�in�the
vehicle.
The�NFC�control�unit�and�the�WCA�are�not�shown�in�the�bus�overview�by�the�BMW�diagnosis�system
ISTA.�Diagnosis�is�performed�via�the�Body�Domain�Controller.
Further�information�on�the�wireless�charging�station�(WCA)�can�be�found�in�the�Product�Information
"General�Vehicle�Electronics�2018".
3.8.�Control�units�on�the�Ethernet
3.8.1.�Active�Cruise�Control�(ACC)
Active�Cruise�Control�(ACC)
The�control�unit�for�active�cruise�control�for�ACC�Stop&Go�contains�a�radar-based�sensor�(FRS)�for
sensing�the�area�in�front�of�the�vehicle.�Both�the�near�and�far�ranges�are�monitored�by�one�sensor.
45
3.8.2.�Rear�view�camera�(RFK)
Rear�view�camera
On�vehicles�with�a�rear�view�camera�without�other�cameras�a�rear�view�camera�on�the�Ethernet�is�used.
3.9.�Control�units�on�the�PT-CAN
3.9.1.�Digital�Motor�Electronics�(DME)
Digital�Motor�Electronics�DME�and�DME2
The�DME�control�units�are�pictured�in�the�graphic.�The�DME�control�unit�is�located�on�the�left�side�in
the�direction�of�travel.
The�DME�is�responsible�for�the�control�of�the�combustion�engine.�In�addition,�the�DME�is�the�gateway
between�PT-CAN�and�PT-CAN2.
46
The�DME�control�unit�is�installed�for�6–cylinder�gasoline�engines.
The�DME2�control�unit�is�installed�in�addition�to�the�DME�control�unit�for�8-cylinder�engines.
3.9.2.�Instrument�cluster�(KOMBI)
Instrument�cluster�(KOMBI)
Exclusively�the�multifunctional�instrument�display�is�used�in�the�G05.
3.9.3.�Night�vision�electronics�(NVE)
Night�vision�electronics�(NVE)
The�control�unit�Night�Vision�Electronics�receives�picture�information�from�the�Night�Vision�camera.
The�picture�information�is�transmitted�via�Color�Video�Blanking�Signal�to�the�HEAD�UNIT�and�can�then
be�displayed�on�demand�in�the�CID,�instrument�cluster�and�Head‐Up�Display.
47
3.10.�Control�units�on�the�PT-CAN2
3.10.1.�Electronic�transmission�control�(EGS)
Electronic�transmission�control�(EGS)
The�control�unit�for�electronic�transmission�control�is�installed�directly�in�the�automatic�transmission.
3.10.2.�Gear�selector�switch�(GWS)
Gear�selector�switch�(GWS)
The�gear�selector�switch�GWS�is�used�for�selecting�a�drive�position.
48
The�bus�connection�is�realized�via�the�PT-CAN2�and�additionally�via�a�local�CAN�to�the�electronic
transmission�control�(EGS)�unit.
3.10.3.�Power�Control�Unit�(PCU)
PCU
The�Power�Control�Unit�is�required:
• For�charging�the�auxiliary�battery
• For�supplying�the�vehicle�electrical�system�from�the�auxiliary�battery.
The�Power�Control�Unit�(PCU)�contains�a�DC/DC�converter�with�a�power�of�500 W.
The�preconditions�for�the�direction�of�the�energy�management�are�calculated�from�the�use�of�the
vehicle.�The�auxiliary�battery�is�charged�by�the�PCU�when�the�engine�is�running.�When�the�combustion
engine�is�not�running,�e.g.�automatic�engine�start-stop�function,�the�PCU�supplies�energy�from�the
auxiliary�battery�to�the�vehicle�electrical�system.
49
3.11.�Control�units�on�the�FlexRay
3.11.1.�Advanced�Crash�Safety�Module�(ACSM)
Crash�Safety�Module�(ACSM)
The�ACSM�records�the�yaw�rate�and�sends�this�information�on�the�FlexRay�data�bus.
The�function�of�the�Crash�Safety�Module�(ACSM)�is�to�permanently�evaluate�all�sensor�signals�in�order
to�identify�a�crash�situation.�The�ACSM�evaluates�the�information�from�the�sensors�and�then�forwards
corresponding�measures�for�selective�activation�of�the�necessary�restraint�systems.
No�additional�yaw�sensors�are�therefore�required�for�the�other�systems.
3.11.2.�Dynamic�Stability�Control�(DSCi)
Dynamic�Stability�Control�(DSCi)
50
DSCi�consists�of�2�integrated�control�units,�the�Dynamic�Stability�Control�and�the�Virtual�Integration
Platform.
The�DSCi�control�unit�and�the�DSCi�hydraulic�control�unit�are�screwed�together.�The�DSCi�control�unit
can�be�replaced�individually�to�reduce�servicing�costs.�The�functions�of�the�tire�pressure�control�(RDC)
and�the�electric�parking�brake�are�integrated�in�the�DSCi�control�unit.
3.11.3.�Electric�active�roll�stabilization
Electric�active�roll�stabilization�front�(EARSV)
Electric�active�roll�stabilization�rear�(EARSH)
Electric�active�roll�stabilization�rear�(EARSH),�Electric�active�roll�stabilization�front�(EARSV).
The�Electric�active�roll�stabilization�control�units�are�installed�directly�in�the�corresponding�actuator.
51
3.11.4.�Electronic�Power�Steering�(EPS)
Electronic�Power�Steering�(EPS)
The�Electronic�Power�Steering�(electromechanical�power�steering)�is�supplied�with�12 V.
The�steering�angle�information�is�determined�by�the�EPS�and�made�available�to�the�other�control�units
via�the�FlexRay�bus.
3.11.5.�Rear�axle�slip�angle�control�(HSR)
Rear�axle�slip�angle�control�(HSR)
The�control�unit�for�slip�angle�control�is�responsible�for�steering�the�rear�axle.
52
3.11.6.�Transfer�box
Transfer�box
The�control�unit�for�the�transfer�box�controls�the�clutch�in�the�transfer�box�on�vehicles�with�xDrive.
3.11.7.�Vertical�Dynamic�Platform�(VDP)
Vertical�Dynamic�Platform�(VDP)
The�control�unit�for�the�vertical�dynamic�platform�is�required�for�the�following�equipment:
• Dynamic�Damper�Control
53
The�VDP�control�unit�has�the�following�tasks:
• Controlling�the�valves�in�the�shock�absorbers
• Sensing�the�ride�heights�of�the�vehicle�through�the�ride�height�sensors.
3.12.�Control�units�on�the�local�CAN
The�control�units�on�the�local�CAN�are�not�shown�in�the�bus�overview�by�the�BMW�diagnosis�system
ISTA.�Diagnosis�takes�place�via�the�corresponding�primary�control�unit.
3.12.1.�Front�radar�sensor,�short-range�sensor
Radar�sensor�right�(RSR)�and�radar�sensor�left�(RSL)
The�control�units�for�radar�sensor�front�right�(RSR)�and�radar�sensor�front�left�(RSL)�are�installed�at�the
front�right�and�front�left�of�the�vehicle�for�the�optional�equipment�Driving�Assist�Plus.
54
4.�Voltage�Supply
4.1.�Overview�of�voltage�supply
4.1.1.�System�wiring�diagram,�version�1
Voltage�supply,�version�1
55
Index Explanation
2 Power�distribution�box,�front�left
3 Alternator
4 Starter�motor
6 Remote�positive�terminal,�auxiliary�battery,�engine�compartment
7 Auxiliary�battery,�engine�compartment
9 Power�distribution�box,�vehicle�interior,�right
14 Battery
15 Fuse�in�the�rear�power�distribution�box,�battery,�rear
16 Safety�battery�terminal
17 Fuse�in�the�power�distribution�box,�(PCU)
19 Power�distribution�box,�vehicle�interior,�left
56
4.1.2.�Dual�storage�system,�system�wiring�diagram,�version�2
Voltage�supply,�version�2
57
Index Explanation
1 Alternator
2 Starter�motor
4 Auxiliary�lithium�ion�battery,�engine�compartment
5 Power�distribution�box,�vehicle�interior,�right
8 Fuse�in�the�rear�power�distribution�box,�battery,�rear
10 Battery
12 Crash�Safety�Module�(ACSM)
13 Power�distribution�box,�front�left
58
4.2.�Components
4.2.1.�Overview�of�luggage�compartment
Battery
Index Explanation
1 Power�distribution�box,�battery,�right
4 Power�distribution�box,�battery,�middle
6 Battery
The�vehicle�battery�in�the�G05�is�an�AGM�battery�with�90 Ah�or�105 Ah.�The�battery�variant�depends
on�the�engine�version,�optional�equipment.
59
4.2.2.�Overview�of�engine�compartment
Auxiliary�battery,�engine�compartment
Index Explanation
a Version�1,�AGM�auxiliary�battery�60 Ah
b Version�2,�lithium�ion�auxiliary�battery�10 Ah
2 Auxiliary�AGM�battery,�engine�compartment�60 Ah
3 Remote�positive�terminal,�auxiliary�battery,�engine�compartment
4 Jump�start�terminal�point
5 Capacitor
7 Auxiliary�lithium�ion�battery,�engine�compartment�10 Ah
8 Remote�positive�terminal,�10 Ah�battery
9 Jump�start�terminal�point
10 Capacitor
The�auxiliary�battery�in�the�engine�compartment�of�the�G05�is�an�AGM�battery�with�60 Ah�or�a�10 Ah
lithium�ion�battery.�The�battery�variant�is�dependent�on�the�optional�equipment�active�roll�stabilization
(ARS).
60
4.2.3.�Battery
AGM�batteries�are�used�for�the�voltage�supply�in�the�G05.
There�may�be�2�batteries�of�different�sizes�in�the�vehicle,�depending�on�the�engine�version�and�the
vehicle�equipment:
• AGM�starter�battery�in�the�luggage�compartment�with�90 Ah�or�105 Ah
• Auxiliary�AGM�battery�in�the�engine�compartment�with�60 Ah
• Lithium�ion�auxiliary�battery�in�the�engine�compartment�with�10 Ah
An�auxiliary�battery�in�the�engine�compartment�is�used�to�provide�assistance�for�the�vehicle�electrical
system.�On�vehicles�with�electric�active�roll�stabilization,�the�two�anti-roll�bar�actuators�are�also
supplied�with�power�by�this�battery.
The�dual�storage�system�is�used�in�vehicles�without�active�roll�stabilization;�a�10 Ah�lithium�ion�battery
is�installed�parallel�to�the�AGM�battery.
The�dual�storage�system�is�used�for�the�first�time�in�the�US�market.
Detailed�information�on�the�battery�and�the�dual�storage�system�can�be�found�in�the�document
"General�Vehicle�Electronics�2018"
4.2.4.�Intelligent�battery�sensor
The�IBS�records�the�following�data�of�the�12 V�battery:
• Voltage
• Current
• Pole�temperature.
The�IBS�performs�the�calculation�and�the�evaluation�of�the�information.�The�results�are�then�forwarded
via�the�LIN�bus�to�the�higher-level�control�units�(Electrical�Digital�Motor�Electronics�and�Body�Domain
Controller).
61
4.2.5.�Safety�battery�terminal
Safety�battery�terminal
The�safety�battery�terminal�(SBK)�is�activated�in�the�event�of�an�accident�of�corresponding�severity.
The�voltage�supply�to�the�positive�battery�connection�point�in�the�engine�compartment�is�interrupted
and�the�consumers�connected�to�this�are�de-energized.�The�safety�battery�terminal�is�installed�in�the
power�distribution�box�next�to�the�battery.
4.2.6.�AGLR�alternator
Alternators�with�increased�efficiency�(active�alternator�power�regulation)�are�used�in�the�G05.�The
increase�in�alternator�efficiency�is�achieved�by�reducing�the�losses�in�the�rectifier.�The�loss-causing
diodes�are�replaced�by�actively�activated�MOSFET�transistors.�A�reduction�in�fuel�consumption�is
achieved�by�increasing�the�efficiency.
Different�alternators�are�used�depending�on�the�engine�type�and�vehicle�equipment.
Versions:
• Bosch�with�180�A�and�250�A�for�6-cylinder�engine
• Valeo�with�250�A�for�8-cylinder�engine
62
4.2.7.�Integrated�supply�module
Integrated�supply�module
The�engine�control�and�its�components�are�supplied�with�a�12 V�voltage�via�the�integrated�supply
module.
4.2.8.�Power�distribution�box,�front�right
Power�distribution�box,�front�right
A�relay�for�terminal�30B�is�installed�in�the�front�right�power�distribution�box.
Consumers�are�supplied�with�terminal�30,�terminal�30B�and�terminal�15N�and�provided�with
corresponding�fuse�protection�by�the�front�right�power�distribution�box.�Terminal�15N�is�supplied�from
the�front�power�distribution�box�by�the�rear�power�distribution�box.
63
4.2.9.�Power�distribution�box,�front�left
Power�distribution�box,�front�left
A�relay�for�terminal�30B�is�installed�in�the�front�left�power�distribution�box.
Consumers�are�supplied�with�terminal�30�and�terminal�30B�and�provided�with�corresponding�fuse
protection�by�the�front�left�power�distribution�box.
4.2.10.�Power�distribution�box,�rear
Power�distribution�box,�rear
64
The�following�relays�are�installed�in�the�rear�power�distribution�box:
• 2�relays,�terminal�30F
• 2�relays,�terminal�30B
• Relay,�terminal�15N
• Relay�for�rear�window�heating
All�relays�are�of�bi-stable�design.�The�relays�are�activated�by�the�Body�Domain�Controller�via�the�LIN
bus.�The�hard-wired�terminal�30B�relays�of�the�two�front�power�distribution�boxes�are�activated�via�the
rear�power�distribution�box.
4.2.11.�Body�Domain�Controller
The�Body�Domain�Controller�(BDC)�is�responsible�for�the�terminal�control.
A�terminal�30F�relay�is�installed�in�the�BDC.
A�number�of�consumers�are�supplied�with�terminal�30�and�terminal�30F�and�provided�with
corresponding�fuse�protection�via�the�BDC.
4.2.12.�PCU�with�vehicle�electrical�system�assistance�measure
PCU
Modern�vehicles�have�a�high�energy�consumption�due�to�the�many�electrical�consumers.�As�a�result,
there�is�a�high�demand�on�the�battery,�particularly�in�phases�in�which�the�combustion�engine�is�not
running�and�the�alternator�supplies�no�energy�(e.g.�engine�start-stop�phases).
In�order�to�protect�the�vehicle�battery,�a�DC/DC�converter�is�installed�in�the�Power�Control�Unit�(PCU)
and�an�auxiliary�battery�in�the�engine�compartment�in�the�G05.
65
The�preconditions�for�the�direction�of�the�energy�management�are�calculated�from�the�use�of�the
vehicle.�When�the�engine�is�running�the�auxiliary�battery�is�charged�from�the�conventional�vehicle
electrical�system.�During�the�phases�in�which�the�combustion�engine�is�not�running,�e.g.�automatic
engine�start-stop�function,�the�energy�is�supplied�from�the�auxiliary�battery�into�the�conventional
vehicle�electrical�system.
The�Power�Control�Unit�(PCU)�contains�a�control�unit�which�is�connected�to�the�PT-CAN2�and�a�DC/
DC�converter�with�a�power�of�500 W.
In�vehicles�with�the�electric�active�roll�stabilization�equipment�this�is�supplied�by�the�AGM�60 Ah
auxiliary�battery�in�the�engine�compartment.
66
5.�Terminal�Control
5.1.�Introduction
The�terminal�control�in�the�G05�is�identical�to�the�terminal�control�of�the�G12.�In�the�G05,�the�vehicle
is�always�in�the�right�condition�from�the�point�of�view�of�the�customer.�The�terminals�are�controlled
via�a�customer-oriented�condition�management.�The�terminal�control�is�dependent�on�the�vehicle
conditions.
5.2.�Vehicle�conditions
The�G05�vehicle�may�be�in�the�following�conditions:
• PARKING
• RESIDING
• DRIVING
The�different�vehicle�functions�are�possible�depending�on�the�relevant�conditions.
PARKING
• Customer�not�in�the�vehicle.
• Vehicle�secured�or�not�used�for�a�certain�time.
• Vehicle�functions�cannot�be�operated.
RESIDING
• Customer�in�the�vehicle.
• No�driving�readiness.
• Functions�that�are�relevant�when�the�vehicle�is�stationary�can�be�operated.
DRIVING
• Customer�in�the�vehicle.
• Driving�readiness�established.
• All�functions�are�available.
The�vehicle�conditions�are�changed�by�condition�management,�taking�into�account�the�customer
behavior.�Additional�information�is�also�evaluated�that�may�help�to�determine�the�vehicle�condition,
e.g.:
• Door�opening.
• Door�closing.
• Operations�in�the�vehicle.
67
The�following�diagram�shows�the�changes�between�the�vehicle�conditions:
Vehicle�conditions
Index Explanation
A Vehicle�condition�PARKING
B Transitional�condition�with�stationary�functions
C Vehicle�condition�RESIDING
D Transitional�condition�for�establishing�driving�readiness,
ending�driving�readiness�or�Check/Analysis/Diagnosis
E Vehicle�condition�DRIVING
1 Unlock�vehicle
2 Press�start/stop�button�+�brake�pedal
3 Press�START-STOP�button
4 Locks�vehicle
5 No�activity�of�a�vehicle�user�detected�for�10 min
6 Extended�press
68
Detailed�overview�of�vehicle�conditions.
Overview�of�vehicle�conditions
Index Explanation
A Vehicle�condition�DRIVING
B Vehicle�condition�RESIDING
C Vehicle�condition�PARKING
a Transitional�condition�for�ESTABLISHING/ENDING�DRIVING�READINESS,
CHECK/ANALYSIS/DIAGNOSIS
b Transitional�condition�with�STATIONARY�FUNCTIONS
1 Operation�of�start/stop�button�+�brake�pedal�+�valid�remote�control�or�valid�ID
transmitter�in�the�vehicle�interior
69
Index Explanation
2 Driving�readiness�established,�terminal�15N�(terminal�50)
3 Operation�of�start/stop�button�(three�times�within�0.8�s)�+�valid�remote�control
or�valid�ID�transmitter�in�the�vehicle�interior
4 Terminal�15N
5 Operation�of�start/stop�button�+�selector�lever�in�Neutral
6 Undoing�driver's�seat�belt�(v�<�0.1 km/h,�driver's�door�opened,�selector�lever
not�in�Neutral,�brake�not�pressed,�low�beam�off,�no�OBD�communication,�no
diagnosis�mode,�no�assembly�mode)
7 Door�contact�change�(v�<�0.1 km/h,�driver's�seat�belt�undone,�selector�lever
not�in�Neutral,�brake�not�pressed,�low�beam�off,�no�OBD�communication,�no
diagnosis�mode,�no�assembly�mode)
8 Press�start/stop�button�+�vehicle�is�stationary�or�press�start/stop�button�for�at
least�1 s�+�driving�speed�≥�10 km/h�or�press�start/stop�button�at�least�three
times�within�4 s�+�driving�speed�≥�10 km/h
9 Press�START-STOP�button
10 Terminal�30B
11 Unlock�vehicle
12 Residing�interaction�or�stationary�function�interaction
13 Locks�vehicle
14 No�customer�interaction�for�10 minutes
15 Extended�press�of�head�unit�media�button
16 Terminal�30F
Automatic�switch-off
Automatic�switch-off
Switch�off�after�door�opening.
In�the�menu�"Doors/Keys",�an�immediate�change�from�the�vehicle�condition�RESIDING�to�the�vehicle
condition�PARKING�can�be�activated.
If�this�option�is�activated,�the�system�will�immediately�change�to�the�vehicle�condition�PARKING
when�the�driver's�door�is�opened.�The�omission�of�the�after-running�period�in�the�vehicle�condition
RESIDING�saves�energy.
70
5.3.�Power�supply�terminals
Control�units�in�the�vehicle�must�be�supplied�with�power�only�when�they�are�needed.�The�following
terminals�are�used�in�the�G05:
• Terminal�15N
• Terminal�30B
• Terminal�30F
• Terminal�30.
Terminal�15N�supplies�control�units�which�are�needed�only�when�driving�and�which�may�be�needed�to
safely�end�a�journey.�After-run�of�5�s�starts�at�the�transition�from�DRIVING�to�RESIDING.
Terminal�30B�is�used�to�supply�control�units�that�are�needed�in�the�stationary�mode�in�the�condition
RESIDING�and�for�stationary�functions�where�the�customer�is�not�in�the�vehicle.�An�after-run�of
6 minutes�starts�at�the�transition�from�RESIDING�to�PARKING,�and�terminal�30B�is�then�switched�off.
Terminal�30F�is�used�to�supply�control�units�which�must�perform�functions�in�PARKING�condition.
Terminal�30F�is�normally�switched�on�in�PARKING�condition,�but�may�be�switched�off�due�to�faults�in
the�vehicle�electrical�system.�Terminal�30F�is�switched�off�with�an�after-running�period�of�1 minute�if�a
fault�is�detected.
Terminal�30�control�units�(e.g.�alarm�system)�are�always�supplied�with�voltage�and�are�also�not
switched�off�in�the�event�of�a�fault.
Terminal�30F Terminal�30B Terminal�15N

PARKING,�vehicle off off off
electrical�system�not
OK�(fault�in�vehicle
electrical�system)
PARKING,�vehicle one off off
electrical�system�OK
Stationary�functions one one off
(customer�not�in
vehicle)
RESIDING one one off
DRIVING one one one
Testing-analysis-diagnosis�(PAD)�mode
The�vehicle�condition�testing-analysis-diagnosis�is�still�present�for�diagnosis.�All�terminals�are
switched�on�in�this�mode.�This�ensures�that�diagnosis�can�be�performed�with�all�control�units.�This
vehicle�condition�is�displayed�in�the�BMW�diagnosis�system�ISTA.
Activation�of�the�PAD�mode:
• Operation�of�the�start/stop�button�(three�times�within�0.8 s)�+�valid�remote�control�or�valid�ID
transmitter�in�the�vehicle�interior
• By�the�BMW�diagnosis�system�ISTA.
71
The�PAD�mode�is�exited�by�pressing�the�start/stop�button�or�by�closing�the�diagnosis�with�BMW
diagnosis�system�ISTA.
5.4.�Partial�network�operation
Today's�premium�vehicles�contain�up�to�70�control�units�with�well�over�100 micro�controllers�which�are
networked�with�each�other.�However,�depending�on�the�current�vehicle�condition�or�the�vehicle�user
requirement,�not�all�comfort�and�assistance�systems�may�always�be�needed.
It�is�possible�to�save�energy,�relieve�the�load�on�the�battery�and�also�prolong�the�battery�life�by�targeted
deactivation�and�activation�on�control�units�which�are�not�needed,�so-called�selective�partial�network
operation.
If�functions�are�not�used�or�needed�when�driving,�e.g.:
• Seat�adjustment
• Trailer�lighting�(no�trailer�attached)
The�corresponding�control�units�can�be�switched�off.
In�vehicles�with�combustion�engine,�the�electrical�energy�consumption�is�indirectly�linked�to�the�fuel
consumption�via�the�alternator.�As�a�result,�selective�deactivation�of�control�units�that�are�not�currently
needed�can�contribute�to�reducing�fuel�consumption�and�thus�also�CO2�emissions.
5.4.1.�Prerequisites�for�partial�network�operation
The�partial�network�primary�in�the�Body�Domain�Controller�calculates�a�partial�network�status�on
the�basis�of�the�current�vehicle�condition�and�the�required�functions.�The�control�units�that�are�not
required�are�switched�off�by�means�of�the�corresponding�bus�messages.
5.4.2.�Prerequisites�of�control�units�for�partial�network�operation
Different�transceivers�are�used�in�order�to�realize�partial�network�operation�in�control�units.�These
transceivers�are�able�to�evaluate�and�interpret�messages.�This�control�unit�remains�switched�off�as
long�as�any�bus�communication�takes�place�without�a�valid�wake-up�event�for�the�corresponding
control�unit�being�present.�If�a�valid�wake-up�event�for�the�corresponding�control�unit�is�sent�on�the
bus,�the�transceiver�can�activate�the�voltage�regulator�of�the�micro�controller�and�the�control�unit�starts
up.�The�control�unit�is�switched�off�by�deactivation�of�the�voltage�regulator.
72
6.�Exterior�Lighting
6.1.�Versions
The�following�exterior�light�versions�are�offered�for�the�G05:
• Adaptive�Full�LED�headlight�(standard�all�models)
• BMW�laserlight�optional�all�models�(SA 5AZ).
The�G05�no�longer�features�a�turning�light�switch.
The�new�light�operating�unit�comprises�only�buttons.
The�low-beam�headlight�is�automatically�switched�on�when�the�system�recognizes�that�it�is�dark,�even
in�the�OFF�mode�and�when�driving�readiness�is�activated�(country-specific).
6.2.�Front�exterior�lights
Headlight�versions�for�the�G05:
Headlight�versions
Index Explanation
1 Adaptive�Full�LED�headlights
2 BMW�Laserlight
73
Front�exterior�lights
74
Index Explanation
1 Left�headlight�with�Frontal�Light�Electronics�Left�(FLEL)
2 Left�fog�light
3 Right�fog�light
4 Right�headlight�with�Frontal�Light�Electronics�Right�(FLER)
5 Ride�height�sensor,�front�right
6 Fuses�in�the�power�distribution�box,�front�right
8 Fuse�in�the�Body�Domain�Controller
9 Turn�indicator�on�exterior�rearview�mirror,�right
10 Ride�height�sensor,�rear�right,�CAN�terminator
11 Fuse�for�rear�right�power�distribution�box
12 Ride-height�sensor,�rear�left
13 VDP�control�unit
14 Turn�indicator�on�exterior�rearview�mirror,�left
15 Light�switch
19 Rain-light-solar-condensation�sensor�(RLSBS)
20 Ride�height�sensor,�front�left
All�headlight�versions�and�turn�indicators�are�fitted�exclusively�with�LEDs.
6.2.2.�Adaptive�Full�LED�headlights
Adaptive�Full�LED�headlights
75
Index Explanation
1 Low-beam�headlight/High-beam�headlight
2 Turn�indicator
3 Side�lights�and�daytime�driving�lights
5 Cornering�light
On�the�adaptive�LED�headlight�the�low-beam�headlight�and�high-beam�headlight�are�in�the�same
reflector.
6.2.3.�BMW�laserlight
BMW�laser�light
Index Explanation
1 Low-beam�headlight
2 Turn�indicator
4 High�beam
6 High�beam
8 Cornering�light
The�manufacturer�of�Laser�Light�II�is�the�company�Automotive�Lighting.
76
6.3.�Rear�exterior�lights
Rear�exterior�lights
77
Index Explanation
2 Future�Brake�System�(IB)
3 Electronic�transmission�control�(EGS),�fuses
in�the�power�distribution�box,�front�right
4 CAN�terminator
8 Rear�light�cluster,�right�outer
9 Rear�fog�light,�right�(not�for�US)
10 Rear�light�cluster,�right�inner
11 Number-plate�light,�right
12 Number-plate�light,�left
13 Rear�light�cluster,�left�inner
14 Rear�fog�light,�left�(not�for�US)
15 Rear�light�cluster,�left�outer
16 Interference�suppression�filter
17 Additional�brake�light
78
6.3.2.�Rear�light
Rear�light
Index Explanation
1 Tail�light
2 Brake�light
3 Turn�indicator
4 Reversing�light
5 Side�marker�light
79
6.4.�KAFAS
On�vehicles�with�camera-based�driver�assistance�systems�(KAFAS),�the�function�of�the�high-beam
assistant�is�performed�by�KAFAS.
KAFAS�camera
Index Explanation
A KAFAS�Mid
B KAFAS�High
KAFAS�camera�with�high-beam�assistant
80
Index Explanation
1 High-beam�assistant�(FLA)
2 Fuse�for�front�right�power�distribution�box
8 CAN�terminator
Detailed�information�on�the�KAFAS�camera�can�be�found�in�the�document�"General�Vehicle�Electronics
2018"
6.5.�Ground�lighting
The�ground�lighting�is�integrated�in�the�corresponding�door�modules.�The�LEDs�of�the�ground�lighting
are�activated�directly�by�the�Body�Domain�Controller�(BDC).
6.6.�Light�carpet
The�light�source�is�integrated�in�the�side�sill�so�that�it�is�invisible�for�the�customer.�The�function�can�be
realized�in�a�very�small�installation�space�through�the�use�of�a�multi-lens�array�system.�A�very�flat�angle
of�radiation�is�also�possible.�The�graphic�is�superposed�several�times�by�the�multi-lens�array�system
and�is�therefore�insensitive�to�dirt�contamination.�The�light�carpet�is�activated�by�the�Body�Domain
Controller�(BDC).
6.7.�Trailer�lighting
81
Trailer�lighting
82
Index Explanation
3 CAN�terminator
6 Trailer�module�(AHM)
7 Button�for�trailer�tow�hitch
8 Motor�for�trailer�tow�hitch
9 Trailer�socket
Vehicles�with�a�trailer�coupling�are�equipped�with�a�trailer�module�AHM.�The�trailer�module�is
responsible�for�the�following�functions:
• Light�control�for�trailer
• Monitoring�the�trailer�power�circuits
• Control�and�monitoring�of�the�fully�automatic�trailer�tow�hitch.
83
7.�Wash/Wipe�System
Wash/wipe�system
84
7.�Wash/Wipe�System
Index Explanation
1 Outside�temperature�sensor
2 Washer�fluid�level�sensor
3 Washer�pump�for�Night�Vision�camera
4 Motor�for�window�washer�pump,�windscreen�and�rear�window
7 Fuse,�BDC
9 Wiper�motor,�tailgate
10 Steering�column�switch�cluster�(SZL),�wiper�motor
12 Rain‐light‐solar-condensation�sensor
13 Wiper�motor
14 Heated�washer�jet,�left
15 Heated�washer�jet,�center
16 Heated�washer�jet,�right
The�wiper�motor�is�a�12 V�motor�with�gearing.�The�control�unit,�the�wiper�motor�and�the�transmission
form�one�replaceable�unit.�This�wiper�motor�unit�comprises:
• A�permanently�excited�direct�current�motor�with�attached�reduction�gear
• Control�unit�electronics�with�eccentric�shaft�sensor�and�suppressor�components�with
attached�plug�connection.
The�control�unit�in�the�wiper�motor�is�able�to�identify�the�following�faults:
• Faults�in�the�control�unit�electronics
• Short�circuits�at�the�motor�and�sensor�system
• Open�lines�at�the�motor�and�sensor�system.
The�control�unit�in�the�wiper�motor�does�not�have�a�fault�memory.�The�fault�code�entry�is�effected�in
the�Body�Domain�Controller�(BDC).
The�heated�washer�jets�are�activated�by�the�Body�Domain�Controller.
The�Body�Domain�Controller�is�also�responsible�for�actuation�of�the�window�washer�pumps�and
evaluation�of�the�washer�fluid�level�switch.
85
8.�Alarm�System
Alarm�system
86
8.�Alarm�System
Index Explanation
1 Hood�contact�switch
4 Door�contact,�front�passenger�side,�front
5 CAN�terminator
6 Door�contact�on�front�passenger�side,�rear
8 Siren�with�tilt�alarm�sensor
9 Tailgate�contact�switch�in�the�tailgate�lock
10 Door�contact�on�driver's�side,�rear
12 LED�in�the�interior�mirror
13 Door�contact,�driver's�side,�front
The�alarm�system�in�the�G05�is�equipped�with�an�ultrasonic�interior�movement�detector�for�monitoring
the�vehicle�interior.�The�ultrasonic�interior�movement�detector�(USIS)�is�fully�integrated�in�the�roof
function�center�(FZD).
The�door�contacts,�engine�compartment�lid�contact�switch�and�the�opening�of�the�tailgate�are
monitored�by�the�Body�Domain�Controller.�As�soon�as�a�status�changes,�the�ultrasonic�interior
movement�detector�receives�this�information�via�the�K-CAN2.�If�the�alarm�system�is�activated,�the�siren
with�tilt�alarm�sensor�is�activated�by�the�control�unit�in�the�event�of�a�break-in.
The�siren�with�tilt�alarm�sensor�(SINE)�is�connected�via�a�local�LIN�bus�to�the�roof�function�center.
The�status�of�the�alarm�system�is�displayed�via�the�LED�at�the�interior�mirror.
87
9.�Power�Window�Regulator
Power�window�regulator
88
9.�Power�Window�Regulator
Index Explanation
3 Power�window�motor,�passenger's�side
4 Power�window�switch,�front�passenger�side,�front
5 Power�window�motor,�passenger's�side�rear
6 Power�window�switch,�front�passenger�side�rear
7 Switch,�side�window�roller�sun�blind,�rear�right
9 Switch,�side�window�roller�sun�blind,�rear�left
11 Power�window�switch�driver's�side,�rear
12 Power�window�motor,�driver's�side�rear
14 Power�window�motor,�driver's�side�front
89
10.�Electric�Steering�Column
Electric�steering�column
90
10.�Electric�Steering�Column
Index Explanation
4 Steering�column�adjustment�button
5 Memory�switch
6 Electronics�for�steering�column�adjustment
7 Motor�for�electric�steering�column�adjustment,�height
8 Motor�for�electric�steering�column�adjustment,�vertical
91
11.�Interior�Lighting
11.1.�Ambient�lighting
The�Body�Domain�Controller�controls�the�ambient�lighting�that�includes�11�predefined,�selectable�light
designs.
The�Sky�Lounge�panorama�roof�is�available�as�optional�equipment�and�an�enhancement�of�the�ambient
lighting.�It�can�be�activated�with�six�different�colors.
3�LED�modules�are�installed�on�either�side�of�the�panorama�roof�for�the�ambient�lighting.�The�light
design,�special�functions�and�brightness�can�be�selected�via�the�controller.�The�selected�design�is
displayed�on�the�CID.
Some�functions�additional�functions�can�be�implemented�for�alerts�using�the�ambient�lighting:
• The�ambient�lighting�can�change�the�colors�as�a�warning,�e.g.�when�a�door�is�opened.
• In�the�event�of�an�incoming�call,�the�ambient�lighting�can�indicate�this�visually.
• Welcome/Goodbye�dimming�is�also�available�as�a�further�function.
92
Interior�lighting,�ambient�lighting
93
Index Explanation
1 Ambient�lighting,�instrument�panel,�top
2 Lighting,�instrument�panel,�left
3 Lighting,�instrument�panel,�middle
4 Lighting,�instrument�panel,�right
5 Fuses�in�power�distribution�box,�front�right
6 Body�Domain�Controller�(BDC),�lighting,�center�stack
7 Lighting,�storage�compartment,�door,�passenger's�side,�front�right
8 Lighting,�door�opener,�passenger's�side,�front�right
9 Lighting,�power�window�switch,�passenger's�side,�front�right
10 Contour�line�lighting,�door,�passenger's�side,�front�right
11 Lighting,�storage�compartment,�door,�passenger's�side,�rear�right
12 Lighting,�door�opener,�passenger's�side,�rear�right
13 Lighting,�power�window�switch,�passenger's�side,�rear�right
14 Contour�line�lighting,�door,�passenger's�side,�rear�right
15 Fuses,�power�distribution�box,�rear�right
16 Panorama�glass�roof,�rear
17 Sky�Lounge�panorama�roof�lighting,�front�right
18 Sky�Lounge�panorama�roof�lighting,�front�left
23 Center�console,�lighting
24 Center�console,�accent�lighting,�left
25 Center�console,�accent�lighting,�right
26 Driver's�seat,�lighting
27 Driver's�seat,�lighting,�backrest,�left
28 Driver's�seat,�lighting,�backrest,�bottom�left
29 Front�passenger�seat,�lighting
30 Front�passenger�seat,�lighting,�backrest,�right
31 Front�passenger�seat,�lighting,�backrest,�bottom�right
32 Contour�line�lighting,�door,�driver's�side,�rear�left
33 Lighting,�door�opener,�driver's�side,�front�left
34 Lighting,�power�window�switch,�driver's�side,�front�left
35 Contour�line�lighting,�door,�driver's�side,�front�left
94
Index Explanation
36 Contour�line�lighting,�door,�driver's�side,�front�left
37 Lighting,�door�opener,�driver's�side,�rear�left
38 Lighting,�power�window�switch,�driver's�side,�rear�left
39 Contour�line�lighting,�door,�driver's�side,�rear�left
40 Footwell�light,�front�left
41 Contour�lines,�instrument�panel
42 Contour�line�lighting,�instrument�panel,�bottom�right
43 Contour�lines,�instrument�panel,�right
44 Footwell�light,�front�right
RGB�(red,�green,�blue)�LED�modules�are�used�for�the�ambient�lighting.
The�ambient�lighting�is�controlled�via�a�separate�LIN�bus.�The�individual�LED�modules�are�connected
via�a�local�interconnect�network�bus.�The�LED�modules�are�connected�in�series�to�the�LIN�bus�around
the�vehicle.
If�the�LIN�bus�is�interrupted�at�a�certain�point�or�the�micro�controller�on�the�LED�is�faulty,�then�further
light�transmittance�is�interrupted�at�this�point.�A�search�for�the�fault�must�be�carried�out�at�the�location
where�the�last�LED�illuminates.
11.2.�Speaker�illumination
In�a�vehicle�with�a�Bowers�&�Wilkins�audio�system,�the�lighting�for�the�speaker�trims�is�activated�via�the
Receiver�Audio�Module�(RAM).
LED�modules�are�used�for�the�speaker�cover�lighting.
The�lighting�is�controlled�via�a�local�LIN�bus�by�RAM�to�the�LED�modules�of�the�speaker�trims.
95
RAM�control�unit
96
Index Explanation
1 Mid-range�speaker,�roof,�front�left
2 Lighting�for�center�speaker
3 Mid-range�speaker,�front�center
4 Tweeter,�front�center
5 Head�Unit�High
6 Mid-range�speaker,�roof,�front�right
8 Body�Domain�Controller�(BDC),�lighting
9 Tweeter,�door,�passenger's�side,�front�right
10 Lighting,�trim,�tweeter,�door,�passenger's�side
11 Lighting,�trim,�tweeter,�door,�passenger's�side
12 Mid-range�speaker,�door,�passenger's�side,�front�right
13 Bass�speaker,�right
14 Mid-range�speaker,�roof,�rear�right
15 Tweeter,�door,�passenger's�side,�rear�right
16 Lighting,�trim,�mid-range�speaker,�door,�passenger's�side,�rear
17 Mid-range�speaker,�door,�passenger's�side,�rear�right
18 Tweeter,�D-pillar,�passenger's�side,�rear�right
19 Mid-range�speaker,�D-pillar,�passenger's�side,�rear�right
21 Fuse,�battery�distributor,�rear
22 Booster�(hi-fi)
23 RAM�(Receiver�Audio�Module)
24 Mid-range�speaker,�D-pillar,�passenger's�side,�rear�left
25 Tweeter,�D-pillar,�passenger's�side,�rear�left
26 Speaker�for�outside�sound
27 Mid-range�speaker,�door,�driver's�side,�rear�left
28 Lighting,�trim,�mid-range�speaker,�door,�driver's�side,�rear
29 Tweeter,�door,�driver's�side,�rear�left
30 Mid-range�speaker,�roof,�rear�left
31 Bass�speaker,�left
32 Mid-range�speaker,�door,�driver's�side,�front�left
33 Lighting,�trim,�mid-range�speaker,�door,�driver's�side
34 Lighting,�trim,�tweeter,�door,�driver's�side
35 Tweeter,�door,�driver's�side,�front�left
97
12.�Door�Mirror
12.1.�Exterior�mirror�High
Exterior�mirror�High
98
12.�Door�Mirror
Index Explanation
1 Outside�temperature�sensor
8 Inside�mirror
The�instrument�cluster�receives�the�value�of�the�ambient�temperature�from�the�outside�temperature
sensor�and�makes�this�available�via�the�PT-CAN.�The�Body�Domain�Controller�evaluates�the�signal
and�triggers�the�activation�of�the�mirror�heating�via�the�local�interconnect�network�bus.�The�control
of�the�heater�output�is�dependent�on�the�ambient�temperature�and�the�switch�position�of�the�driving
experience�switch.
The�mirror�servomotors�are�activated�by�the�mirror�electronics.�The�request�for�adjusting�the�exterior
mirror�is�received�by�the�mirror�electronics�via�the�local�interconnect�network�bus.
99
13.�Seats
13.1.�Front�seats
13.1.1.�Memory�sports�seat,�driver's�side,�front
Memory�sports�seat,�driver's�side,�front
100
13.�Seats
Index Explanation
4 CAN�terminator
5 Motor,�longitudinal�seat�adjustment
6 Motor,�seat�angle�adjustment
7 Motor,�seat�height�adjustment
8 Motor,�backrest�angle�adjustment
9 Motor,�head�restraint�height�adjustment
10 Driver's�seat�module SMFA
11 Valve�block,�backrest�width�adjustment
12 Seat�pneumatics�module�pump
13 Valve�block,�lumbar-support�adjustment
14 Switch,�seat�adjustment
15 Seat�heating�pad,�backrest
16 Seat�heating�pad,�seat�surface
17 Memory�switch
101
13.�Seats
13.1.2.�Multi-contour�seat,�front
The�following�wiring�diagram�shows�the�seat�on�the�driver's�side.�The�passenger's�side�is�identical�but
reversed�left-to-right.
Multi-contour�seat,�front,�driver's�side
102
13.�Seats
Index Explanation
5 CAN�terminator
6 Motor,�longitudinal�seat�adjustment
7 Motor,�seat�angle�adjustment
8 Motor,�seat�height�adjustment
9 Motor,�backrest�angle�adjustment
10 Motor,�head�restraint�height�adjustment
11 Motor,�seat�depth�adjustment
12 Motor,�backrest�head�adjustment
13 Motor,�backrest�width�adjustment
14 Motor,�backrest�width�adjustment
15 Motor,�active�seat�ventilation,�seat�surface
19 Motor,�active�seat�ventilation,�backrest�surface
23 Driver's�seat�module (SMFA)
24 Seat�pneumatics�module�pump
25 Valve�block,�lumbar-support�adjustment
26 Seat�heating�pad,�backrest
27 Seat�heating�pad,�seat�surface
28 Switch,�seat�adjustment
30 Memory�switch
103
13.�Seats
13.2.�Electric�seats,�rear�passenger�compartment
13.2.1.�Electric�seats�with�seat�heating,�rear�passenger�compartment
Electric�seats,�rear�passenger�compartment
104
13.�Seats
Index Explanation
3 Seat�adjustment�switch,�rear�right
4 CAN�terminator
5 Switch,�through-loading�facility,�right
6 Seat�module,�rear�right
7 Switch,�seat�folding,�right
8 Motor,�backrest�angle�adjustment,�right
9 Switch,�convenient�entry,�right
10 Motor,�longitudinal�seat�adjustment,�right
11 Motor,�convenient�entry,�right
12 Microswitch,�end�position,�convenient�entry,�right
13 Seat�heating�pad,�seat�surface,�passenger’s�side�rear
14 Switch,�backrest�emergency�release,�right
15 Seat�heating�pad,�backrest,�passenger’s�side�rear
17 Rear�function�module
18 Switch,�longitudinal�seat�adjustment,�in�luggage�compartment
19 Seat�heating�pad,�backrest,�driver’s�side�rear
20 Switch,�backrest�emergency�release,�left
21 Seat�heating�pad,�seat�surface,�driver’s�side�rear
22 Microswitch,�end�position,�convenient�entry
23 Motor,�convenient�entry,�left
24 Microswitch,�end�position,�convenient�entry
25 Motor,�longitudinal�seat�adjustment,�left
26 Switch,�convenient�entry,�left
27 Motor,�backrest�angle�adjustment,�left
28 Switch,�seat�folding,�left
29 Seat�module,�rear�left
30 Switch,�through-loading�facility,�left
31 Seat�adjustment�switch,�rear�left
32 Memory�switch
105
13.�Seats
13.3.�Massage
8�different�massage�functions�in�the�backrest�and�seat�cushion�are�available�to�activate�or�relax
muscles.�This�allows�the�back�muscles�to�be�relaxed�and�the�strain�on�the�spinal�discs�to�be�relieved.
The�8�programs�are�divided�into�3�categories:
• Mobilization�.
• Relaxation.
• Vitalization.
In�the�case�of�mobilization�,�the�strain�on�the�spine�is�relieved�by�targeted�body�movements.
In�the�relaxation�program,�the�muscles�are�relaxed�by�massage.
The�vitalization�program�is�made�up�of�both�mobilization�and�relaxation.�The�combination�of�movement
and�massage�ensures�relaxation�and�recuperation�particularly�on�long�journeys.
106
13.�Seats
13.3.1.�Seat�massage,�both�front�seats
Seat�massage,�both�front�seats
107
13.�Seats
Index Explanation
3 CAN�terminator
4 Switch�block,�front�passenger�door
5 Switch,�lumbar�support,�front�passenger�seat
6 Seat�pneumatics�module�front�right
7 Seat�pneumatics�module�pump,�front�passenger�seat
8 Seat�pneumatics�module�pump,�driver's�seat
9 Seat�pneumatics�module�front�left
10 Switch,�lumbar�support,�driver's�seat
108
14.�Panorama�Roof
Panorama�roof
109
14.�Panorama�Roof
Index Explanation
1 Motor,�slide/tilt�sunroof
5 CAN�terminator
6 Sliding�roofliner�motor
110
15.�Steering�Column�Switch�Cluster
Steering�column�switch�cluster
111
15.�Steering�Column�Switch�Cluster
Index Explanation
4 Multifunction�steering�wheel�buttons,�right
5 Touch�detection�(Hands-Off�Detection)
6 Shift�paddle,�right
7 Steering�column�switch,�right
10 Steering�column�switch,�left
11 Driver's�airbag
12 Shift�paddle,�left
13 Steering-wheel�heating�button
14 Steering�wheel�heating
15 Vibration�motor
16 Steering�wheel�module
17 Horn�button
18 Multifunction�steering�wheel�buttons,�left
15.2.�SZL
Steering�column�switch�cluster�(SZL)
All�signals�of�the�buttons�and�switches�of�the�multifunction�steering�wheel�(MFL)�and�the�steering
column�switch�cluster�(SZL)�are�transmitted�via�LIN�to�the�Body�Domain�Controller�(BDC).�The�turn
signal/high�beam�switch�on�the�G05�engages�mechanically�in�the�corresponding�position�when
operated.�The�return�is�mechanical�via�the�steering�wheel.
112
16.�Locking�and�Security�Functions
16.1.�Comfort�Access�2.0.
Comfort�Access�2.0
113
Index Explanation
4 Switch�in�door�lock,�front�passenger�door
5 CAN�terminator
6 Outside�door�handle�electronics�(TAGE),�front�passenger�door
7 Comfort�Access�aerial,�side�sill,�right
8 Switch�in�door�lock�of�rear�passenger�door
9 Outside�door�handle�electronics�(TAGE),�rear�passenger�door
11 Luggage�compartment�light,�right
12 Tailgate�function�module�(HKFM)
13 Control�unit�for�contactless�tailgate�opening
14 Sensor�at�bottom�for�contactless�tailgate�opening
15 Sensor�at�top�for�contactless�tailgate�opening
16 Button�for�closing�tailgate
18 Button�for�tailgate
19 Acoustic�warning�device�for�tailgate�activation
20 Luggage�compartment�light,�left
21 Comfort�Access�aerial,�luggage�compartment
22 Outside�door�handle�electronics�(TAGE),�rear�driver's�side�door
24 Switch�in�door�lock�of�rear�driver's�side�door
25 Comfort�Access�aerial,�side�sill,�left
26 Comfort�Access�aerial,�vehicle�interior
27 Outside�door�handle�electronics�(TAGE),�driver's�door,�with�Near�Field
Communication�(NFC)
28 Switch�in�door�lock�of�driver's�door
29 Wireless�charging�station�with�control�electronics�for�Near�Field
Communication
30 Power�window�electronics,�driver's�side�front
31 Comfort�Access�aerial,�vehicle�interior
114
Detailed�information�on�Comfort�Access�2.0�can�be�found�in�the�document�"General�Vehicle
Electronics�2018"
115
16.2.�Central�locking�system
116
Central�locking�system
117
Index Explanation
1 Fuses�in�power�distribution�box,�front�right,�hotel�position�switch�(dependent
on�national-market�version)
3 Door�lock,�front�passenger�door
4 Central�locking�button,�front�passenger�door�(depending�on�the�national-
market�version)
5 Integrated�power�window�electronics,�front�passenger�door
6 Door�lock,�passenger's�side,�rear
7 Fuse�in�the�rear�power�distribution�box
8 Servodrive�for�fuel�filler�flap
10 Automatic�Soft�Close�drive
11 Button�for�closing�tailgate
13 Door�lock,�driver's�side,�rear
14 Integrated�power�window�electronics,�driver's�door
15 Central�locking�button,�driver's�door
16 Door�lock,�driver's�door
18 Button�for�opening�tailgate
16.2.2.�Function
The�function�of�the�central�locking�system�of�the�G05�is�based�on�that�of�current�BMW�models.�All
functions�relevant�for�the�central�locking�system�are�controlled�by�the�Body�Domain�Controller.�The
function�is�as�follows:
• The�radio�signal�from�the�ID�transmitter�is�received�by�the�remote�control�receiver.
• The�signal�causes�the�BDC�to�activate�the�central�locking�system�and�the�interior�lighting.
• The�BDC�evaluates�the�status�of�all�the�door�contacts,�the�tailgate�and�the�hotel�position
switch.
• The�status�of�the�central�locking�system�button�is�also�evaluated�by�the�BDC.�The�BDC
activates�the�central�locking�system,�depending�on�the�status.
• The�BDC�is�responsible�for�activation�of�the�central�locking�system�and�the�drive�for�soft-close
automatic�in�the�tailgate.
• Activation�of�fuel�filler�flap�unlocking�is�also�performed�by�the�BDC.
118
16.3.�Upper�section�of�tailgate
G05�Wiring�diagram,�upper�section�of�tailgate
119
Index Explanation
5 CAN�terminator
6 Fuses�in�the�rear�power�distribution�box
7 Tailgate�lift�drive,�right
8 Tailgate�function�module�HKFM
9 Acoustic�warning�device�for�tailgate�activation
10 Button�for�tailgate
11 Button�for�closing�tailgate�(inner)
12 Tailgate�lift�drive,�left
15 Button�for�opening�tailgate,�driver's�door
16 Power�window�motor,�driver's�side�front
120
16.4.�Tailgate�lower�section
G05�Wiring�diagram,�lower�section�of�tailgate
121
Index Explanation
2 CAN�terminator
6 Tailgate�lock,�right
7 Spindle�drive,�lower�section�of�tailgate
8 Door�lock,�tailgate,�top
9 Automatic�Soft�Close�drive,�tailgate�upper�section
10 Tailgate�push-button
11 Tailgate�lock,�left
Detailed�information�on�the�tailgate�can�be�found�in�the�document�"G05�Complete�Vehicle"
122
16.5.�Automatic�Soft�Close�system
Automatic�Soft�Close�system
123
Index Explanation
2 Switch�in�door�lock,�front�passenger�door
3 Automatic�Soft�Close�drive,�front�passenger�door
4 Switch�in�door�lock�of�rear�passenger�door
5 Automatic�Soft�Close�drive,�rear�passenger�door
8 Automatic�Soft�Close�drive,�tailgate
9 Automatic�Soft�Close�drive,�rear�driver's-side�door
10 Switch�in�door�lock�of�rear�driver's�side�door
11 Automatic�Soft�Close�drive,�driver's�door
12 Switch�in�door�lock�of�driver's�door
124
17.�Interior�Mirror
Inside�mirror
Index Explanation
1 Inside�mirror
The�interior�mirror�is�connected�with�the�Body�Domain�Controller�via�LIN�bus.
The�LED�for�the�alarm�system�is�located�at�the�interior�mirror.
125
18.�Passive�Safety�System
The�passive�safety�system�of�the�G05�is�based�on�the�objectives�and�characteristics�of�current�BMW
models.�The�passive�safety�system�fulfils�all�legislative�requirements�worldwide.
The�restraint�systems�ensure�that�the�risk�of�injury�is�reduced.
A�5th�generation�Advanced�Crash�Safety�Module�(ACSM)�is�used�as�the�central�airbag�control�unit�for
the�passive�safety�system�in�the�G05.
18.1.�System�overview.
18.1.1.�System�wiring�diagrams
To�carry�out�repairs�on�the�passive�safety�system,�please�always�use�the�wiring�diagram�specified�in
the�diagnosis�system.
126
System�wiring�diagram
G05�System�wiring�diagram
127
Index Explanation
1 Dynamic�Stability�Control�(integrated�DSCi)
2 Airbag�front�sensor,�left
3 Instrument�cluster�KOMBI
5 Switch�for�front�passenger�airbag�deactivation�(not�US)
6 Front�passenger�airbag
7 Airbag�front�sensor,�right
9 Knee�airbag,�front�passenger
11 Head�airbag,�right
12 Airbag�sensor,�door,�right�(pressure)
13 Reversible�electromotive�reel,�front�passenger�(REMA)
14 Acceleration�sensor,�B-pillar�on�right
15 Seat�occupancy�mat�(not�US)
16 Adaptive�belt�force�limiter,�passenger's�side
17 Seat�occupancy�mat,�CIS�mat
18 Automatic�tensioner,�front�passenger
19 Seat-position�sensor,�front�right
20 End�fitting�pretensioner,�front�right
21 Crash-active�head�restraint,�front�passenger
22 Side�airbag,�front�passenger
23 Seat�belt�buckle�switch,�front�passenger
24 Side�airbag,�rear�right
25 Electronic�fuel�pump�control
26 Seat�belt,�rear�right�(with�reel�pretensioner
depending�on�national-market�version)
27 Seat�belt�buckle�switch,�rear�right
28 Safety�battery�terminal�SBK
29 Seat�belt�buckle�switch,�rear�center
30 Telematic�Communication�Box�2�(TCB2)
31 Seat�belt�buckle�switch,�rear�left
32 Seat�belt,�rear�left�(with�reel�pretensioner
33 Side�airbag,�rear�left
34 Seat�belt�buckle�switch,�driver
128
Index Explanation
35 Side�airbag,�driver's�side
36 Crash-active�head�restraint,�driver
37 End�fitting�pretensioner,�front�left
38 Seat-position�sensor,�front�left
39 Automatic�tensioner,�driver
40 Adaptive�belt�force�limiter,�driver's�side
41 Acceleration�sensor,�B-pillar�on�left
42 Reversible�electromotive�reel,�driver�(REMA)
44 Airbag�sensor,�door,�left�(pressure)
45 Head�airbag,�left
46 Knee�airbag,�driver
129
System�overview�of�US�version
G05�system�overview�for�vehicles�in�US�version
Index Explanation
1 Airbag�front�sensor,�right
2 Lithium�ion�battery*�(if�installed)
4 Knee�airbag,�front�passenger
5 Switch�for�front�passenger�airbag�deactivation�(not�for�US)
6 Airbag�sensor,�door,�right�(pressure)
7 Front�passenger�airbag
8 Acceleration�sensor,�B-pillar�on�right
9 Automatic�tensioner,�front�passenger
10 Seat�belt�buckle�switch,�front�passenger
11 Side�airbag,�front�passenger
130
Index Explanation
13 Crash-active�head�restraint,�front�passenger
14 Head�airbag,�right
15 Side�airbag,�rear�right
16 Seat�belt,�rear�right�(with�reel�pretensioner
17 Power�distribution�box,�luggage�compartment
19 Safety�battery�terminal�SBK
20 Seat�belt�buckle�switch,�rear�center
21 Seat�belt�buckle�switch,�rear�right
22 Electronic�fuel�pump�control
23 Central�information�display�CID
24 Crash�Safety�Module�(ACSM)
25 Seat�belt,�rear�left�(with�reel�pretensioner
26 Side�airbag,�rear�left
27 Head�airbag,�left
28 Seat�belt�buckle�switch,�rear�left
29 Crash-active�head�restraint,�driver
30 Side�airbag,�driver's�side
31 Automatic�tensioner,�driver
32 Acceleration�sensor,�B-pillar�on�left
33 Seat�belt�buckle�switch,�driver
35 Airbag�sensor,�door,�left�(pressure)
36 Instrument�cluster�KOMBI
37 Knee�airbag,�driver
38 Dynamic�Stability�Control�(integrated�DSCi)
39 Airbag�front�sensor,�left
*The�lithium�ion�battery�has�an�integrated�battery�isolating�relay,�which�also�switches�off�if�the�safety
battery�terminal�(SBK)�is�triggered.
131
Lithium�ion�battery
Index Explanation
1 Battery�isolating�relay
18.2.�Functions.
18.2.1.�System�monitoring�functions
Deactivation�of�airbags
Provision�is�made�in�US�versions�of�the�vehicles�for�the�airbag�to�be�deactivated�automatically�in�order
to�satisfy�the�regulations�of�the�National�Highway�Traffic�Safety�Administration�NHTSA.�When�the�child
seats�listed�in�the�regulation�are�occupied�by�a�child�this�must�lead�to�deactivation�of�the�airbag.
To�do�so,�a�seat�occupancy�mat�is�used�on�the�front�passenger�seat�for�the�purpose�of�occupancy
detection�and�classification�of�occupants�in�the�front�passenger�seat.�A�Capacitive�Interior�Sensing
mat�(CIS�mat)�is�used�in�the�G05.
The�CIS�mat�is�made�up�of�two�elements:�A�sensor�wire,�which�runs�parallel�to�the�seat�heating�in
the�seat�cushion,�and�an�evaluation�unit.�The�CIS�mat�measures�the�capacity�and�ohmic�resistance
between�the�sensor�wire�(anode)�and�the�vehicle�ground�(cathode)�at�a�frequency�of�120�kHz.�The
CIS�mat�determines�from�the�change�in�capacity�and�resistance�whether�the�front�passenger�seat�is
occupied�by�an�adult�or�a�child�in�a�child�seat.
The�deactivation�of�the�front�passenger�airbag,�the�side�airbag�and�knee�airbag�on�the�passenger's
side�is�signalled�by�the�indicator�lamp�for�front�passenger�airbag�deactivation.
132
The�indicator�lamp�for�front�passenger�airbag�deactivation�in�the�roof�function�center�lights�up�if�a
child�seat�with�child,�for�e.g.�a�child�restraint�system�that�has�been�tested�in�accordance�with�the
NHTSA�regulations�and�is�holding�a�small�child,�was�detected�on�the�front�passenger�seat�or�if�the
front�passenger�seat�is�unoccupied.
18.3.�System�components.
18.3.1.�Advanced�Crash�Safety�Module
The�Advanced�Crash�Safety�Module�(ACSM)�in�the�G05�is�located�centrally�in�the�vehicle�under�the
center�console�between�the�two�front�seats.�The�central�sensor�system�is�integrated�in�the�Advanced
Crash�Safety�Module�(ACSM).
G05�Crash�Safety�Module�ACSM
The�ACSM�5�of�the�G05�is�a�bus�user�in�the�FlexRay.�The�sensor�data�of�the�central�sensor�system
which�was�previously�provided�by�Integrated�Chassis�Management�(ICM)�can�be�transmitted�directly
by�the�Crash�Safety�Module�(ACSM)�via�FlexRay.
18.3.2.�Sensors�and�switches
Lateral�and�longitudinal�acceleration�sensor
The�lateral�and�longitudinal�acceleration�sensors�assist�with�the�identification�of�head-on�crashes,
side-on�crashes�and�rear-end�crashes.
The�airbag�sensor�consists�of�a�longitudinal�acceleration�sensor�and�a�lateral�acceleration�sensor.
The�acceleration�sensors�measure�in�X�and�Y�direction�the�positive�and�negative�acceleration.�The
resultant�from�the�X�and�Y�signals�is�decisive�in�identifying�the�direction�of�the�crash.�The�airbag
133
sensors�assist�with�the�identification�of�head-on,�side-on�and�rear-end�crashes.�The�airbag�sensors
on�the�left�and�right�are�of�identical�design�and�are�allocated�by�way�of�mechanical�encoding�during
installation.
G05�Lateral�and�longitudinal�acceleration�sensor
Door�airbag�sensor�(pressure)
Pressure�sensors�are�installed�in�the�driver's�and�front�passenger�doors�on�the�G05.�The�pressure
sensors�in�the�doors�are�now�no�longer�attached�with�a�bolt�as�was�previously�the�case,�but�instead�are
screwed�into�the�bracket�(inner�door�panel)�and�the�electrical�connections�and�plug�connections�can
only�be�connected�once�the�relevant�sensors�have�been�installed.
Side�crashes�are�identified�with�the�assistance�of�the�airbag�sensors.�In�addition�to�the�lateral
acceleration�values�that�are�present,�the�pressure�in�the�door�cavity�also�increases�in�the�event�of�a
side-on�crash.
The�airbag�sensors�in�the�doors�are�used�to�verify�the�plausibility�of�the�acceleration�signals�from
the�B-pillar�airbag�sensors�and�the�Advanced�Crash�Safety�Module�(ACSM)�when�a�side-on�crash�is
detected.�The�airbag�sensors�are�situated�in�the�inner�panel�of�the�doors�and�measure�the�pressure
increase�in�the�event�of�a�side-on�collision.�In�the�event�of�a�side-on�collision�at�the�door�the�outer�skin
is�pushed�inwards.�The�door�interior�is�reduced�in�size�and�the�inner�pressure�increases.�This�pressure
change�is�measured�by�the�airbag�sensors.�The�airbag�sensor�also�includes�electronics,�in�addition
to�the�pressure�sensor,�that�digitize�the�pressure�readings�and�transmit�them�cyclically�to�the�Crash
Safety�Module�(ACSM).�The�data�transfer�is�effected�analog�to�the�airbag�sensors�in�the�B-pillars.�The
pressure�readings�are�evaluated�in�the�Advanced�Crash�Safety�Module�(ACSM).
134
G05�Door�airbag�sensor�(pressure)
Airbag�front�sensor
Two�front�sensors�are�installed�in�the�front�area�of�the�engine�support�in�the�US�version�of�the�vehicles.
The�measured�values�are�forwarded�to�the�Advanced�Crash�Safety�Module�(ACSM)�where�they�are
evaluated.
The�airbag�front�sensors�on�the�left�and�right�assist�with�the�identification�of�a�head-on�crash.
The�sensors�deliver�additional�information�to�the�Advanced�Crash�Safety�Module�(ACSM)�on�the
characteristics�and�severity�of�the�collision.�Each�sensor�contains�an�acceleration�sensor�for�recording
the�deceleration,�signal�processing�technology�and�electronics�for�data�transfer.�The�measured�values
are�sent�in�the�form�of�a�message�to�the�Advanced�Crash�Safety�Module�(ACSM)�and�are�used�in�the
calculation�of�the�algorithm.
135
G05�Airbag�front�sensor
Sensors�in�the�ACSM
In�the�G05,�the�central�sensor�system�is�integrated�in�the�Crash�Safety�Module�(ACSM).�The�Crash
Safety�Module�(ACSM)�contains�a�longitudinal�and�lateral�acceleration�sensor,�a�vertical�acceleration
sensor�and�a�roll�rate�sensor�for�impact�detection.�The�Crash�Safety�Module�(ACSM)�also�includes�a
longitudinal�and�lateral�acceleration�sensor�and�a�yaw�sensor�for�the�driving�dynamics�control.
The�sensor�data�for�impact�detection�is�evaluated�in�the�Crash�Safety�Module�(ACSM)�and�helps�to
identify�side-on,�rear-end�or�head-on�crashes�and�assists�with�roll-over�detection.�The�sensor�data�not
yet�evaluated�for�the�driving�dynamics�control�is�sent�to�the�DSC�control�unit�via�FlexRay�where�it�is
processed.
136
G05�Crash�Safety�Module�(ACSM)
Emergency�call�button
The�emergency�call�button�is�located�in�the�roof�function�center.
G05�Roof�function�center�FZD�with�emergency�call�button
Index Explanation
1 Emergency�call�button
137
Front�passenger�airbag�deactivation
On�the�US�version�of�vehicles,�the�capacitive�interior�sensing�mat�(CIS�mat)�is�fitted�in�the�front
passenger�seat.�The�CIS�mat�detects�whether�the�front�passenger�seat�is�occupied�by�an�adult�or�a�by
child�in�a�child�seat.�The�deactivation�of�the�front�passenger�airbag,�the�side�airbag�and�the�knee�airbag
on�the�passenger's�side�is�signalled�by�the�indicator�light�for�front�passenger�airbag�deactivation.
Indicator�lamp�for�front�passenger�airbag�deactivation
In�the�G05,�the�indicator�lamp�for�front�passenger�airbag�deactivation�is�located�in�the�roof�function
center.�The�indicator�lamp�for�front�passenger�airbag�deactivation�in�the�European�and�US�versions
of�the�vehicles�is�identical.�With�the�European�version�of�the�vehicles�the�indicator�lamp�for�front
passenger�airbag�deactivation�is�activated�and�lights�up�yellow�if�the�front�passenger�airbag�and�the
side�airbag�on�the�front�passenger�side�have�been�deactivated�by�the�switch�for�front�passenger
airbag�deactivation.�In�the�US�version�of�the�vehicles,�the�indicator�lamp�for�front�passenger�airbag
deactivation�is�automatically�activated�if�the�CIS�mat�detects�a�small�child�in�a�child�seat�or�if�the�front
passenger�seat�is�unoccupied.
G05�Indicator�lamp�for�front�passenger�airbag�deactivation
Index Explanation
1 Indicator�lamp�for�front�passenger�airbag�deactivation
Seat-position�sensors
In�accordance�with�the�US�legal�requirement�(FMVSS208),�a�height�identification�for�the�person�in
the�driver�and�front�passenger�seat�must�be�effected.�This�height�identification�is�effected�via�the
adjustment�travel�of�the�forward/back�seat�adjustment.�In�US-version�vehicles,�the�exact�position�is
identified�using�the�seat-position�sensors�for�the�driver�and�front�passenger�seats.
The�job�of�the�seat-position�detector�is�to�distinguish�between�a�relatively�small�person�and�a�person
of�normal�height�within�the�lengthways�adjustment�range�of�the�seat.�This�detection�is�another
technical�feature�aimed�at�increasing�the�safety�of�the�occupants.�The�deployment�of�the�two�airbag
stages�is�then�adjusted�to�the�driver's/front�passenger's�seat�position.
138
The�seat-position�detector�takes�the�form�of�a�2-wire�hall�effect�sensor�and�is�supplied�with�power�via
the�Crash�Safety�Module�(ACSM).�The�current�level�of�the�seat-position�sensor�changes�depending�on
the�seat�position.
18.3.3.�Actuators
Overview
The�following�actuators�are�installed�in�the�G05:
• Two-stage�driver's�airbag
• Two-stage�front�passenger�airbag
• Knee�airbag,�front�left�and�right
• Head�airbag,�left�and�right
• Crash-active�head�restraint,�front�left�and�right
• Side�airbag,�front�left�and�right
• Side�airbag,�rear�left�and�right
• Belt�tensioner�with�adaptive�force�limiter
• Safety�battery�terminal
In�addition,�the�following�indicator�lights�inform�the�vehicle�occupants�about�the�condition�of�the�safety
systems:
• Airbag�indicator�light
• Seat�belt�warning�light
• Indicator�lamp�for�front�passenger�airbag�deactivation.
The�familiar�three-point�seat�belts�are�used�as�the�seat�belt�systems�for�all�seats�in�the�G05.
For�further�information,�please�refer�to�the�Product�Information�"G01�Passive�Safety�System".
139
G05�Driver�Assistance�Systems
BMW�Service
Symbols�used
Contents
1. Introduction............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 1
1.1. Further�information............................................................................................................................................................................................. 2
1.1.1. System�Terminology........................................................................................................................................................3
1.2. Overview............................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4
1.2.1. "Driving"�options�structure................................................................................................................................... 4
1.2.2. "Parking"�options�structure................................................................................................................................. 6
1.2.3. Innovations...................................................................................................................................................................................... 7
1.2.4. Installation�locations�of�sensors................................................................................................................... 8
1.3. Bus�overview............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 10
1.4. System�wiring�diagrams......................................................................................................................................................................... 13
1.4.1. Active�Cruise�Control�with�Stop&Go�(SA�5DF)................................................................. 13
1.4.2. Active�Driving�Assistant�(SA�5AS)........................................................................................................ 15
1.4.3. Active�Driving�Assistant�Professional�(SA�5AU).............................................................. 17
1.4.4. Parking�Assistant�Plus�(SA�5DN)............................................................................................................ 19
2. Control�Elements......................................................................................................................................................................................................................21
2.1. Light�operating�unit........................................................................................................................................................................................22
2.2. Multifunction�steering�wheel�(MFL)..................................................................................................................................... 22
2.3. Intelligent�Safety�button......................................................................................................................................................................... 25
2.4. Parking�assistance�button................................................................................................................................................................... 25
3. Daytime�Pedestrian�Protection...................................................................................................................................................................... 26
4. Intersection�Collision�Warning....................................................................................................................................................................... 27
5. Lane�Departure�Warning............................................................................................................................................................................................ 28
5.1. Active�steering�intervention.............................................................................................................................................................. 28
6. Automatic�Lane�Change............................................................................................................................................................................................. 29
6.1. Functional�principle........................................................................................................................................................................................ 29
6.1.1. Monitoring�ranges........................................................................................................................................................... 29
6.2. Operation........................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 32
6.3. Functional�prerequisites......................................................................................................................................................................... 33
6.4. Deactivation�criteria....................................................................................................................................................................................... 33
7. Cruise�Control................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 34
7.1. Active�Cruise�Control�with�Stop&Go�function..................................................................................................... 34
7.2. Speed�Limiter.......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 34
7.2.1. Operation.......................................................................................................................................................................................34
7.3. Speed�Limit�Assistant................................................................................................................................................................................35
8. Automatic�Parking................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 37
Contents
8.1. Maneuvering�out�of�a�parking�space.................................................................................................................................. 37
8.2. Operation........................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 38
9. Back-up�Assistant.................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 39
9.1. Functional�principle........................................................................................................................................................................................ 39
9.2. Operation........................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 40
1.�Introduction
The�most�versatile�range�of�Driver�Assistance�Systems�ever�for�a�BMW�model�was�launched�with�the
introduction�of�the�G12.�Numerous�innovative�systems�have�been�introduced�and�have�opened�the
way�for�highly�automated�driving.�A�year�later,�the�G30�has�increased�the�variety�of�the�product�range
with�new�Driver�Assistance�Systems.
The�new�BMW�X5,�with�the�development�code�G05,�continues�these�innovations.�The�market
introduction�of�the�fourth�BMW�X5�generation�sees�the�availability�for�the�first�time�of�the�Back-up
Assistant,�which�facilitates�comfortable�and�automatically�steered�reversing.�Furthermore,�many�of�the
assistance�systems�introduced�in�the�G30�acquire�new�functions�and�thus�help�the�driver�to�control
the�vehicle�by:
• providing�the�driver�with�information
• prompting�the�driver�with�suggestions
• automatically�intervening�in�the�driving�process.
1
1.�Introduction
1.1.�Further�information
This�reference�manual�introduces�the�innovations�and�adaptations�of�the�Driver�Assistance�Systems�in
the�G05.�The�focus�is�particularly�on�vehicle-specific�features.�Basic,�system-specific�descriptions
of�the�new�features�and�already�established�Driver�Assistance�Systems�can�be�found�in�the�following
reference�manual:
Reference�Manual Information�on
ST1858�Driver • KAFAS�Mid�camera • Intersection�collision
Assistance�Systems warning
2018 • KAFAS�High�camera
(Innovations) • Active�Cruise�Control�with
• Driver�Camera�System
Stop&Go�function
(DCS)
• Automatic�Parking
• Front�collision�mitigation
• Back-up�Assistant
• Lane�Departure�Warning
• Evasion�Assistant
• Emergency�Stop
Assistant • Automatic�Lane�Change
ST1604�G30�Driver • Collision�warning • Surround�view

Assistance�Systems
(Previously�published) • Speed�Limit�Info • Remote�3D�View
• Intersection�Warning • Park�Distance�Control
(PDC)
• Parking�Maneuvering
• Active�Blind�Spot
Assistant�(PMA)
Detection
• Active�Lane�Keeping
• Cross-traffic�Alert�front/
Assistant
rear
• Evasion�Aid
• BMW�Night�Vision
ST1701�G01�Driver • Hazard�Preview
Assistance�Systems
(Previously�published)
2
1.�Introduction
1.1.1.�System�Terminology
The�names�of�the�Driver�Assistance�Systems�described�in�this�reference�manual�refer�to�the�names
as�seen�by�the�customer�(e.g.�in-vehicle�menus,�owner’s�manual,�sales�literature,�etc.)�The�table�below
shows�these�systems�and�their�corresponding�names�as�found�in�technical�systems:
Name�of�System�in Name�of�System�in Name�of�System�in

Reference�Manual Technical�Systems previously�published
Reference�Manuals
Blind�Spot�Collision�Warning Lane�change�warning�with Active�Blind�Spot�Detection
active�steering�intervention
Front�collision�mitigation Front�collision�warning�with Frontal�Collision�Warning�with
braking�function city�collision�mitigation
Daytime�Pedestrian�Protection Pedestrian�warning�with Daytime�Pedestrian�Protection
braking�function
Evasion�Assistant Avoidance�assistant Evasion�Aid
Lane�Departure�Warning Lane�departure�warning�with Lane�Departure�Warning
active�steering�intervention
Side�collision�mitigation Side�collision�warning�with Side�Collision�Avoidance
steering�intervention
Active�Cruise�Control�with Active�Cruise�Control Active�Cruise�Control�with
Stop&Go Stop&Go
Dynamic�Cruise�Control Dynamic�Cruise�Control Dynamic�Cruise�Control
Steering�Assistant Steering�and�lane�guidance Active�Lane�Keeping�Assistant
assistant
Traffic�Jam�Assistant Traffic�jam�assistant Traffic�Jam�Assistant
Speed�Limiter Speed�Limit�Device N/A
Speed�Limit�Assistant Speedlimit�Assist N/A
Automatic�Lane�Change Lane�change�assistant N/A
Automatic�Parking Parking�maneuvering�assistant Parking�Maneuvering
Assistant
Speed�Limit�Info Road�sign�recognition Road�Sign�Recognition
Intersection�collision�warning Street�crossing�warning�/ Intersection�Warning
junction�warning
Cross�traffic�warning�rear Rear�crossing�traffic�warning Cross�Traffic�Alert�Rear
Cross�traffic�warning�front Front�crossing�traffic�warning Cross�Traffic�Alert�Front
Back-up�Assistant Reversing�Assistant N/A
Emergency�Stop�Assistant N/A N/A
Fatigue�Alert Alertness�assistant Fatigue�and�Focus�Alert
Automatic�High�Beams Non-glare�high-beam High-beam�assistant
assistant
3
1.�Introduction
1.2.�Overview
1.2.1.�"Driving"�options�structure
The�following�tables�are�intended�to�provide�an�overview�of�the�relationships�between�the�options
structure�and�the�Driver�Assistance�Systems�used�as�well�as�their�system�components.�Furthermore,
the�list�contains�all�the�Driver�Assistance�Systems�available�in�the�G05.�This�overview�constitutes�the
information�status�at�the�series�launch�of�the�G05.
Innovations�are�shown�in�"bold�type".
Standard�equipment
The�G05�always�has�the�KAFAS�Mid�camera�and�rear�radar�sensors�short�range�(left�and�right)�as
standard�equipment.�The�following�table�shows�the�Driver�Assistance�System�functions�included�as
standard�equipment.
Active�Driving�Assistant�(SA�5AS)
• Blind�Spot�Collision�Warning
• Front�collision�mitigation
• Daytime�Pedestrian�Protection
• Cross�traffic�warning rear
• Speed�Limit�Info
Dynamic�Cruise�Control�(standard)
• Speed�Limiter
4
1.�Introduction
Optional�equipment
The�customer�can�choose�between�two�additional�levels�of�optional�equipment�in�the�G05:�Active
Cruise�Control�with�Stop&Go�function�(SA�5DF)�or�Active�Driving�Assistant�Professional�(SA 5AU).
When�Active�Driving�Assistant�Professional�(SA5AU)�is�ordered,�Active�Cruise�Control�with�Stop&Go
function�is�included.
Active�Driving�Assistant�Professional�(SA 5AU)
• Steering�Assistant
with�side�collision�mitigation
• Active�Cruise�Control�with
Stop&Go�function�(up�to�180 km/h)
• Cross�traffic�warning�front
• Speed�Limit�Assistant
• Evasion�Assistant
• Intersection�collision�warning
• Automatic�Lane�Change
• Emergency�Stop�Assistant
Active�Driving�Assistant�(SA�5AS)
(standard)
• Blind�Spot
Collision Active�Cruise�Control�with
Warning Stop&Go�function�(SA 5DF)
• Front
• Active
collision
Cruise
mitigation
Control
• Daytime with
Pedestrian Stop&Go
Protection function
(up�to
• Lane
160 km/h)
Departure
Warning • Speed
Limit
• Cross
Assistant
traffic
warning
rear
• Speed
Limit�Info
5
1.�Introduction
1.2.2.�"Parking"�options�structure
The�already�established�optional�equipment�Parking�Assistant�Plus�(SA 5DN)�is�also�offered�in�the
new�BMW�X5.�The�functions�for�the�optional�equipment�Parking�Assistant�Plus�(SA 5DN)�have�been
expanded�to�include�the�Back-up�Assistant�and�parking�space�exit�functions.
Vehicles�that�do�not�have�Automatic�Parking�but�do�have�Park�Distance�Control�(PDC)�have�a�separate
control�unit,�which�is�recognized�as�the�PMA�control�unit�by�diagnosis�and�is�also�referred�to�by�this
name�in�the�bus�diagram.�In�other�words,�there�is�no�longer�a�difference�in�the�naming�of�the�PDC�and
PMA�control�unit�(there�are�however�differences�in�the�hardware�design�between�the�control�units�and
the�software�is�adapted�to�the�equipment�specification).
Parking�Assistant�Plus�(SA 5DN)
• Surround�view�w/3D�view
• Panorama�View�(GPS-based)
• Remote�3D�View
• Automatic�Parking�with�parallel�parking
and�maneuvering�out�of�parking
spaces
• Back-up�Assistant
• Side�protection
• Rear�view�camera
Park�Distance�Control�(PDC)�(standard)
• Front�and�rear
• Auto�PDC
6
1.�Introduction
1.2.3.�Innovations
• The�G05�always�has�a�KAFAS�camera�and�radar�sensors�in�the�rear�of�the�vehicle.
• The�instrument�cluster�has�a�camera�(Driver�Camera�System�(DCS)�aimed�at�the�driver�with
optional�equipment�Active�Driving�Assistant�Professional�(SA�5AU).
• Active�Driving�Assistant�Professional�(SA 5AU)�developed�from�the�optional�equipment�Active
Driving�Assistant�Plus�(SA 5AT),�known�from�the�G12�&�G30.
• A�new�MODE�button�in�the�Driver�Assistance�Systems�control�pad�on�the�multifunction
steering�wheel.
• LED�displays�on�the�steering�wheel�(only�with�optional�equipment�Active�Driving�Assistant
Professional�SA 5AU).
• The�Daytime�Pedestrian�Protection�function�now�also�warns�of�cyclists.
• Speed�Limiter�is�available�for�Dynamic�Cruise�Control�(DCC).
• Speed�Limit�Assistant�is�available�for�the�optional�equipment�Active�Cruise�Control�with
Stop&Go�function�(SA 5DF�or�SA�5AU).
• With�Speed�Limit�Assistant�the�upcoming�speed�limit�may�be�manually�adopted�in�the�cruise
control.
• Evasion�Assistant�is�now�also�available�when�a�pedestrian�warning�is�issued.
• The�Intersection�collision�warning�has�been�enhanced�by�a�city�braking�function.
• Lane�Departure�Warning�performs�an�active�steering�intervention�to�the�middle�of�the�road
with�Active�Driving�Assistant�(SA 5AS).�Previously,�the�optional�equipment�Active�Driving
Assistant�Plus�(SA 5AT)�was�required�for�this.
• Automatic�Parking�for�the�first�time�supports�maneuvering�out�of�parallel�parking�spaces.
• The�parking�assistance�button�no�longer�has�to�be�pressed�and�held�while�maneuvering�into�a
parking�space�when�using�Automatic�Parking.
• The�Back-up�Assistant�is�used�for�the�first�time.
7
1.�Introduction
1.2.4.�Installation�locations�of�sensors
The�sensors�shown�are�used,�depending�on�the�vehicle�equipment.�New�or�revised�sensors�are�shown
enlarged�in�a�magnifying�glass.
G05�sensor�overview�of�assistance�systems
Index Explanation
1 Side�radar�sensor�(HRSNR,�HRSNL,�SRSNVR,�SRSNVL)
2 KAFAS�Mid�camera
3 KAFAS�High�camera
5 Side�view�camera
6 Capacitive�sensor�mat�on�the�steering�wheel�rim
7 Ultrasonic�sensors,�Park�Distance�Control�(PDC),�rear
8
1.�Introduction
Index Explanation
10 Front�radar�sensor�(FRS)
11 Ultrasonic�sensor,�Parking�Maneuvering�Assistant�(PMA)
12 Ultrasonic�sensors,�Park�Distance�Control�(PDC),�front
13 Night�Vision�camera
14 Front�camera
9
1.�Introduction
G05�bus�overview
10
1.�Introduction
Index Explanation
Booster Booster
CON Controller
FDB Remote�control�receiver
HKA�Rear Automatic�rear�air-conditioning�and�heating
climate�control
IHKA Integrated�automatic�heating�/�air�conditioning
KAFAS Camera-based�Driver�Assistance�Systems
PMA Parking�Maneuvering�Assistant
11
1.�Introduction
Index Explanation
SMBF Seat�module,�front�passenger
SMBA Seat�module,�driver
SMBFH Seat�module,�passenger�rear
SMFAH Seat�module,�driver�rear
SRSNVL Side�radar�sensor�short�range�front�left
SRSNVR Side�radar�sensor�short�range�front�right
VTG Transfer�box
WCA/NFC Wireless�charging�station�with�control�electronics
for�Near�Field�Communication
ZGM Central�gateway�module
1 Start-up�node�control�units�for�starting�and�synchronizing
the�FlexRay�bus�system
12
1.�Introduction
1.4.�System�wiring�diagrams
1.4.1.�Active�Cruise�Control�with�Stop&Go�(SA�5DF)
G05�with�optional�equipment�ACC�Stop&Go�(SA�5DF)
13
1.�Introduction
Index Explanation
1 Front�Radar�Sensor�(FRS)
3 CAN�terminator
4 CAN�terminator
6 Head�Unit
9 Controller�(CON)
11 Seat�belt�buckle�contact,�driver’s�seat
12 Door�contact,�driver’s�door
14 Audio�operating�unit
17 CAN�terminator
21 Heating�for�KAFAS�Mid�camera
14
1.�Introduction
1.4.2.�Active�Driving�Assistant�(SA�5AS)
G05�with�standard�equipment�Active�Driving�Assistant�(SA�5AS)
15
1.�Introduction
Index Explanation
2 Heating�for�KAFAS�Mid�camera
5 CAN�terminator
8 Head�Unit
10 Signal�unit�(LED)�in�right�mirror�glass
20 Signal�unit�(LED)�in�left�mirror�glass
22 Head‐Up�Display�(HUD)�(optional)
16
1.�Introduction
1.4.3.�Active�Driving�Assistant�Professional�(SA�5AU)
G05�with�optional�equipment�Active�Driving�Assistant�Professional�(SA�5AU)
17
1.�Introduction
Index Explanation
1 Side�radar�sensor�short�range�front�right�(SRSNVR)
2 Heating�front�radar�sensor�long�range�(FRSF)
4 Side�radar�sensor�short�range�front�left�(SRSNVL)
6 Signal�unit�(LED)�in�right�mirror�glass
9 Control�unit�for�Parking�Maneuvering�Assistant�(PMA)
13 Door�contact,�driver's�door
17 Seat�belt�buckle�contact,�driver's�seat
21 Head�Unit
24 Signal�unit�(LED)�in�left�mirror�glass
29 CAN�terminator
31 CAN�terminator
32 KAFAS�High�camera
33 Heating�for�KAFAS�High�camera
35 CAN�terminator
18
1.�Introduction
1.4.4.�Parking�Assistant�Plus�(SA�5DN)
G05�with�optional�equipment�Parking�Assistant�Plus�(SA�5DN)
19
1.�Introduction
Index Explanation
1 Ultrasonic�sensor�for�PMA
2 Ultrasonic�sensor�for�PDC�front
3 Front�camera
8 CAN�terminator
9 CAN�terminator
12 Right�side�view�camera
13 Parking�Maneuvering�Assistant�(PMA)
15 Ultrasonic�sensor�for�PDC�rear�side
16 Ultrasonic�sensor�for�PDC�rear
19 Head�Unit
21 Parking�assistance�button�and�Panorama�View�button
25 Left�side�view�camera
26 Top�Rear�Side�View�Camera�(TRSVC)
20
2.�Control�Elements
The�Driver�Assistance�Systems�are�operated�during�driving�by�means�of�4�operating�elements:
• Light�operating�unit
• Control�pad�on�the�multifunction�steering�wheel
• Intelligent�Safety�button
• Center�console�control�panel.
G05�Driver�Assistance�Systems�operating�elements
Index Explanation
1 Light�operating�unit
2 Driver�Assistance�Systems�control�pad�on�the�multifunction�steering�wheel
4 Parking�assistance�button
5 Panorama�View�button
The�settings�within�the�Intelligent�Safety�menu�are�made�via�the�controller.�Only�the�operating
elements�relevant�to�the�Driver�Assistance�Systems�are�discussed�in�this�section.�A�full�description�of
the�display�and�operating�elements�of�the�G05�can�be�found�in�the�reference�manual�"G05�Displays
and�Controls".
21
2.1.�Light�operating�unit
The�Night�Vision�button�for�activating�the�heat�image�view�in�the�Central�Information�Display�(CID)
is�located�in�the�light�operating�unit.
G05�Night�Vision�button�for�heat�image�view�in�the�CID
Index Explanation
1 Night�Vision�button
2.2.�Multifunction�steering�wheel�(MFL)
G05�Driver�Assistance�Systems�control�pad�on�the�multifunction�steering�wheel�(MFL)
Index Explanation
A Control�pad�for�standard�equipment
B Control�pad�for�optional�equipment�“Active�Cruise�Control�with
Stop&Go”�(SA�5DF)
C Control�pad�for�optional�equipment�"Active�Driving�Assistant
Professional"�(SA 5AU)
22
Resume�button�for�resuming�a�set�speed
Cancel�button�for�temporarily�deactivating�the�cruise�control
Rocker�button�for�changing�the�set�speed
Set�button�for�saving�the�current�speed
Vehicles�with�Speed�Limit�Assistant:
• Speed�Limit�Assistant�deactivated:
Adoption�of�the�suggested�speed�limit
• Speed�Limit�Assistant�activated:
Change�back�to�the�last�speed�set
Button�for�activating�or�deactivating�Dynamic�Cruise�Control�(DCC)
Button�for�activating/deactivating�the�Speed�Limiter�function
Button�for�activating/deactivating�ACC�Stop&Go�(SA�5DF)
Button�for�increasing�the�distance�to�the�vehicle�in�front
23
Button�for�reducing�the�distance�to�the�vehicle�in�front
Resume/Cancel�button�for�resuming�a�set�speed/temporarily�deactivating�the
cruise�control
Assist�button�for�activating/deactivating�the�Driver�Assistance�System�selected
using�the�MODE�button
MODE�button�for�selecting�the�Driver�Assistance�System
Possible�selection:
• Only�ACC Stop&Go
• ACC Stop&Go�with�Steering�Assistant
(including�Traffic�Jam�Assistant)
To�be�able�to�facilitate�easy�operation�of�the�ever-increasing�Driver�Assistance�Systems�without
additional�buttons,�the�operation�of�the�Driver�Assistance�Systems�has�been�changed�with�the�optional
equipment�Active�Driving�Assistant�Professional�(SA 5AU).�The�Assist�button�is�pressed�to�activate
the�Driver�Assistance�System.�Then,�by�pressing�the�MODE�button,�the�vehicle�will�cycle�between�two
Driver�Assistance�Systems:�either�ACC�Stop&Go�or�ACC�Stop&Go�with�Steering�Assistant�(including
Traffic�Jam�Assistant.)�The�chosen�system�is�now�active.�Pressing�the�Assist�button�while�the�system
is�active�will�deactivate�the�system.
Note:�Changing�the�Driver�Assistance�System�mode�is�only�possible�when�the�system�is�active.
Example:�The�driver�is�using�ACC Stop&Go�and�would�like�to�engage�the�Steering�Assistant.�Pressing
the�MODE�button�would�then�select�the�Steering�Assistant�with�ACC Stop&Go�to�be�able�to�use
both�functions.�If�the�Assist�button�is�pressed�now,�Steering�Assistant�is�deactivated�together�with
ACC Stop&Go.
The�Driver�Assistance�Systems�which�can�be�selected�with�the�MODE�button�are�displayed�to�the
driver�in�the�instrument�cluster�in�the�form�of�a�selection�list.
With�the�optional�equipment�Active�Driving�Assistant�Professional�(SA 5AU)�there�is�an�LED�above
both�the�left�and�the�right�control�pads�on�the�MFL.�The�two�LEDs�provide�additional�visual�indicators
to�the�instructions�issued�in�the�instrument�cluster�and�the�Central�Information�Display.
• Green:�The�assistance�system�is�active�and�assumes�lateral�guidance
(does�not�apply�to�the�US�market)
• Yellow:�Interruption�of�the�assistance�system�pending
• Red:�The�assistance�system�is�deactivated
24
G05�setting�menu,�LED�lighting�elements�in�the�CID
Index Explanation
1 "Feedback�via�steering�wheel"�menu
2 Lighting�elements�on�the�multifunction�steering�wheel�(switch�on�and�off)
The�LEDs�can�be�deactivated�via�the�iDrive�menu:
• "Settings"
• "Driver�Assistance"
• "Feedback�via�steering�wheel"
• "Lighting�elements"
2.3.�Intelligent�Safety�button
The�Intelligent�Safety�button,�already�familiar�from�other�BMW�models,�enables�the�Driver�Assistance
Systems�to�be�operated�from�a�central�location.�The�Intelligent�Safety�button�can�be�used�both�to
switch�the�systems�on�and�off�directly�and�to�call�up�the�Intelligent�Safety�menu�to�personalize�the
settings.
In�the�G05,�depending�on�the�vehicle�equipment,�the�following�Driver�Assistance�Systems�can�be
personalized�via�the�Intelligent Safety�menu:
• Front�collision�warning
• Side�collision�warning
• Steering�intervention
• Blind�Spot�Collision�Warning
2.4.�Parking�assistance�button
The�parking�assistance�button�no�longer�has�to�be�pressed�and�held�while�maneuvering�into�a�parking
space�when�using�Automatic�Parking.�A�single�press�of�the�button�is�sufficient.
25
3.�Daytime�Pedestrian�Protection
The�Daytime�Pedestrian�Protection�function�in�the�G05�is�a�component�part�of�Active Driving�Assistant
(SA 5AS)�and�is�effected�with�the�aid�of�the�KAFAS�Mid�camera.
For�the�first�time,�as�part�of�the�Daytime�Pedestrian�Protection�function,�the�driver�also�receives�a
warning�of�cyclists.�Just�as�with�the�pedestrian�warning,�only�an�acute�warning�is�issued�in�a�speed
range�of�approximately�5-65 km/h�with�the�cyclist�warning.�If�the�acute�warning�is�issued,�an�automatic
brake�intervention�through�to�maximum�deceleration�is�initiated.
When�an�acute�warning�is�issued,�the�same�symbol�is�used�for�both�the�pedestrian�warning�and�for�the
cyclist�warning�in�the�instrument�cluster�(KOMBI)�and,�if�applicable,�in�the�Head-Up�Display�(HUD).
Symbols�(HUD�&�KOMBI) Explanation
Acute�warning:
• Person�symbol�flashes�and�a�signal
sounds
• Request�for�intervention�by�braking
and,�if�necessary,�evasive�action�(if
necessary�assisted�by�the�Evasion
Assistant).
There�are�no�configuration�possibilities�in�the�Intelligent�Safety�menu�for�the�pedestrian�and�cyclist
warning.�The�only�possibility�is�deactivation�by�pressing�the�Intelligent�Safety�button�for�a�long�period.
The�pedestrian�and�cyclist�warning�is�automatically�switched�back�on�after�each�terminal�change.
As�a�result�of�the�new�Evasion�Assistant�functions,�the�Evasion�Assistant�is�also�available�to�the�driver
in�the�event�of�a�pedestrian�and�cyclist�warning.
26
4.�Intersection�Collision�Warning
The�Intersection�collision�warning�is�also�used�in�the�G05.�Since�an�extremely�exact�environment
analysis�must�be�performed�in�front�of�the�vehicle�for�this�function,�the�data�from�the�KAFAS�High
camera,�the�front�radar�sensor�long�range�(FRSF)�and�the�side�radar�sensors�short�range�front
(SRSNVL�and�SRSNVR)�are�evaluated.�Thus,�the�Intersection�collision�warning�with�city�braking
function�is�only�available�with�the�optional�equipment�Active�Driving�Assistant�Professional�(SA 5AU).
In�the�previous�function�characteristics,�an�acute�warning�is�issued�and�a�preconditioning�of�the�brake
system�is�performed.�The�responsibility�for�preventing�an�imminent�collision�is�still�the�driver's�alone.
With�the�introduction�of�the�G05,�the�Intersection�collision�warning�with�city�braking�function�now
provides�assistance�in�the�speed�range�of�approximately 10-80 km/h�as�and,�when�required,�with�a
supporting�brake�intervention.�The�intensity�of�the�brake�intervention�is�controlled�depending�on�the
situation.
In�addition,�the�acute�warning�has�been�supplemented�by�an�advance�warning.�The�warning�time�of�the
Intersection�collision�warning�with�city�braking�function�can�only�be�set�as�part�of�the�Front�collision
warning�in�the�iDrive�menu.
G05�adjusting�the�warning�time
The�Intersection�collision�warning�with�city�braking�function�does�not�relieve�the�driver�of�personal
responsibility�for�correctly�judging�the�visibility�and�traffic�situation.�The�driver's�driving�style�should�be
adapted�to�the�traffic�conditions.�The�driver�should�check�the�traffic�conditions,�and�react�accordingly�if
required.
27
5.�Lane�Departure�Warning
5.1.�Active�steering�intervention
Active�steering�intervention�is�an�innovation�to�the�Lane�Departure�Warning�in�the�G05�with�standard
equipment�Active�Driving�Assistant�(SA 5AS).�This�was�previously�only�possible�with�the�optional
equipment�Active�Driving�Assistant�Plus�(SA 5AT).
Depending�on�the�vehicle�equipment,�the�function�logic�is�implemented�on�different�control�units:
Optional Responsible�control�unit
equipment
Active�Driving • DSC
Assistant
(SA�5AS) • KAFAS�Mid�camera
Active�Cruise • DSC
Control�with
Stop&Go�(SA�5DF) • KAFAS�Mid�camera
Active�Driving • Optional�equipment�system�(SAS)
Assistant
Professional • KAFAS�High�camera
(SA 5AU)
28
6.�Automatic�Lane�Change
The�G05�introduces�the�Automatic�Lane�Change�function�to�the�US�market.�Automatic�Lane�Change
supports�the�driver�when�changing�lanes,�for�example�when�passing�on�highways.�The�system�offers
the�driver�further�convenience�with�this�and�can�contribute�to�avoiding�possible�collisions�with�another
vehicle�travelling�in�the�same�direction.
If�the�driver�has�activated�the�system�and�the�destination�lane�is�free,�the�vehicle�automatically�carries
out�a�steering�wheel�movement�and�returns�to�lane�guidance�(Steering�Assistant)�after�the�lane�change
is�completed.
The�system�assists�the�driver�in�the�speed�range�from�approximately�70�km/h�to�approximately
180�km/h.
6.1.�Functional�principle
Automatic�Lane�Change�is�activated�if�the�driver�operates�the�turn�indicator�(“one-touch�signalling”
and�holds�it�for�approximately�1�second)�with�Steering�Assistant�activated.�This�signals�to�the
system�that�the�driver�would�like�to�change�to�the�adjacent�lane�with�system�support.
First�the�system�analyzes�whether�a�danger-free�lane�change�is�possible,�and�also�whether�sufficient
room�for�the�maneuver�is�available.�The�surroundings�are�monitored�by�the�side�radar�sensors�and�the
data�from�the�KAFAS�camera.�The�KAFAS�camera�is�principally�used�for�lane�detection.
The�radar�sensors�are�not�only�responsible�for�the�detection�of�an�object,�but�are�also�able�to�take�into
consideration�the�speed�of�vehicles�detected�nearby.
6.1.1.�Monitoring�ranges
The�monitoring�ranges�for�the�radar�sensors�are�as�follows:
Sensor�monitoring�range�for�vehicles�behind�the�vehicle
G05�sensor�monitoring�range�for�vehicles�behind�the�vehicle
Index Explanation
1 approximately�70�m
29
Sensor�monitoring�range�for�vehicles�to�the�sides
G05�sensor�monitoring�range�for�vehicles�to�the�sides
Index Explanation
2 approximately�4.5�m
3 approximately�5�m�to�approximately�15�m�(depending�on�the�road�speed)
Sensor�monitoring�range�for�stationary�objects�(roadside�structures)�to�the�sides
G05�sensor�monitoring�range�for�stationary�objects�(roadside�structures)�to�the�sides
Index Explanation
30
The�vehicle�performs�the�lane�change�automatically�if�the�sensor�system�does�not�detect�any
vehicles�in�the�relevant�safety�zone�and�if�there�is�sufficient�room�for�maneuvering�available.�It�is�of�no
importance�whether�the�vehicle�lane�change�is�for�passing�purposes�or�whether�the�driver�is�simply
wishing�to�change�lanes.
The�direction�of�the�lane�change�is�determined�by�the�turn�indicator�which�has�been�previously�set.
G05�Automatic�Lane�Change
The�driver�merely�has�to�monitor�the�lane�change.�This�does�not,�however,�mean�that�he�is�released
from�his�duties�as�a�driver.�For�instance,�the�driver�is�also�obliged�to�check�whether�a�lane�change�is
permissible�at�all,�and�has�to�take�account�of�passing�restrictions,�solid�lines,�etc.�Automatic�Lane
Change�does�not�take�these�circumstances�into�consideration.
Once�the�change�to�the�adjacent�lane�is�complete,�the�vehicle�returns�to�lane�guidance�(Steering
Assistant).
The�lane�change�maneuver�will�be�aborted�if,�once�it�has�started,�the�turn�indicator�lever�is�released�too
soon�(less�than�approximately�1�second),�a�Blind�Spot�Collision�Warning�warning�is�issued�or�an�object
is�detected�to�the�side�of�the�vehicle.�If�the�lane�change�maneuver�is�automatically�cancelled�before�the
vehicle�has�crossed�the�lane�marker,�the�vehicle�is�guided�back�into�the�original�lane.
The�driver�has�full�responsibility�for�the�lane�change�maneuver,�including�checking�that�the�destination
lane�is�free.
The�maximum�steering�torque�has�been�set�in�such�a�way�that�it�can�always�be�overruled�by�the�driver
and�therefore�steering�past�the�maximum�steering�torque�is�possible.�This�means�that�the�driver�has
the�capability�at�all�times�to�abort�the�automatic�lane�change.
31
6.2.�Operation
Automatic�Lane�Change�is�activated�if�the�driver�operates�the�turn�indicator�(“one-touch�signalling”
and�holds�it�for�approximately�1�second)�with�Steering�Assistant�activated.�A�special�precondition
or�individual�configuration�option�for�the�system�is�not�provided.
Displays�in�the�instrument�cluster�(KOMBI)
Symbols Explanation
Steering�wheel�symbol�and�lane�marker�on�right�side�is�green.
The�left�lane�marker�is�grey.�The�green�arrow�indicates�direction�of
Automatic�Lane�Change.
• Request�to�change�to�left�lane�detected.
Steering�wheel�symbol�and�lane�marker�on�left�side�is�green.�The
right�lane�marker�is�grey.�The�green�arrow�indicates�direction�of
Automatic�Lane�Change.
• Request�to�change�to�right�lane�detected.
Automatic�Lane�Change�cannot�replace�the�driver’s�personal�judgement�of�the�traffic�situation.
Therefore,�check�the�traffic�situation�around�the�vehicle�by�looking�around,�otherwise�there�may�be
a�risk�of�an�accident�as�a�result�of�road�users�or�objects�which�lie�outside�the�detection�range�of�the
sensors.�Approaching�vehicles�can�be�detected�too�late�or�not�at�all�because�of�the�limits�inherent�in
the�system.�Automatic�Lane�Change�does�not�release�the�driver�from�his�own�responsibilities.
32
6.3.�Functional�prerequisites
The�following�basic�prerequisites�must�be�met�to�use�Automatic�Lane�Change:
• Steering�Assistant�is�active.
• The�vehicle�is�traveling�on�a�divided�highway.
• The�turn�indicator�lever�is�held�in�the�“one-touch�signalling�position”�for�approximately
1�second.
• The�driving�lane�line�to�be�crossed�has�been�detected.
• “Hands-on”�(hands�on�the�steering�wheel)�must�be�detected�at�the�start�of�the�maneuver.
• Blind�Spot�Collision�Warning�is�active�and�not�issuing�a�warning.
• No�vehicles�have�been�detected�in�the�maneuvering�space�to�the�side�of�the�vehicle.
• No�stationary�objects�(such�as�roadside�structures,�posts,�etc.)�have�been�detected�in�the
maneuvering�space�to�the�side�of�the�vehicle.
• The�vehicle�is�travelling�at�a�speed�between�approximately�70�km/h�and�approximately
180�km/h.
6.4.�Deactivation�criteria
Automatic�Lane�Change�is�automatically�deactivated�in�the�following�situations:
• Automatic�Lane�Change�is�no�longer�executed�if�the�trigger�conditions�are�not�met�within
approximately�10�seconds�from�the�start�of�the�turn�indication.
• Automatic�Lane�Change�will�be�aborted�if,�once�a�lane�change�maneuver�has�started,�the�turn
indicator�lever�is�released�too�soon�(less�than�approximately�1�second),�a�Blind�Spot�Collision
Warning�is�issued�or�an�object�is�detected�to�the�side�of�the�vehicle.
• Automatic�Lane�Change�is�also�aborted�if�the�driver�steers�opposite�to�the�steering�torque
applied�by�the�system.
• If�the�lane�marker�on�the�other�side�of�the�destination�lane�is�not�detected�in�sufficient�time
after�passing�over�the�lane�marking�to�be�crossed.
33
7.�Cruise�Control
7.1.�Active�Cruise�Control�with�Stop&Go�function
The�new�front�radar�sensor�(FRS)�is�used�with�the�optional�equipment�Active�Cruise�Control�with
Stop&Go�function�(SA 5DF).�The�adjustment�range�for�the�set�speed�is�limited�to�a�maximum�of
160 km/h�since�the�FRS�has�a�shorter�range�than�the�FRSF.
On�vehicles�with�the�optional�equipment�Active�Driving�Assistant�Professional�(SA 5AU)�the�set�speed
is�limited,�as�always,�to�a�maximum�of�180 km/h.
7.2.�Speed�Limiter
The�G05�introduces�the�Speed�Limiter�to�the�US�market.�This�function�has�been�available�in�European
markets�for�many�years.
With�the�Speed�Limiter,�the�maximum�speed�of�the�vehicle�can�be�limited�by�the�driver.�The�minimum
value�that�can�be�selected�is�30�km/h.
If�required,�the�driver�can�consciously�exceed�the�speed�limit�by�firmly�accelerating�(pressing�the
accelerator�pedal�down�fully).�The�limit�is�automatically�reactivated�when�the�driver�speed�drops�below
the�set�limit.
The�Speed�Limiter�does�not�initiate�any�active�brake�interventions.�This�means�that�if�the�driver
inadvertently�exceeds�the�set�speed�limit,�as�can�be�the�case�during�downhill�driving�for�example,�the
system�does�not�brake�automatically.
7.2.1.�Operation
The�Speed�Limiter�can�be�activated�and�deactivated�using�the�LIM�button�on�the�multifunction
steering�wheel�(MFL).�The�vehicle’s�current�speed�is�adopted�as�the�speed�limit.�If�the�system�is
activated�while�the�vehicle�is�stationary,�30�km/h�is�automatically�set�as�the�speed�limit.�The�driver
can�increase�or�decrease�the�chosen�speed�limit�by�using�the�rocker�switch�on�the�left�side�of�the
multifunction�steering�wheel�(MFL).
A�mark�is�set�at�the�corresponding�speed�in�the�KOMBI.
The�system�should�only�be�used�when�it�is�possible�to�drive�at�a�constant�speed.�The�driver�is�solely
responsible�for�the�vehicle�and�the�speed�at�which�it�is�driven.
34
7.3.�Speed�Limit�Assistant
The�G05�introduces�the�Speed�Limit�Assistant�to�the�US�market.�The�Speed�Limit�Assistant�function
supports�the�driver�by�adopting�the�speed�limits.
Speed�Limit�Assistant�is�available�for�the�following�systems:
• Active�Cruise�Control�with�Stop&Go�function�(SA�5DF�or�SA�5AU).
Manual�adoption�of�the�speed�limit�is�executed�via�the�SET�button.
G05�displays�in�the�instrument�cluster�when�Speed�Limit�Assistant�is�activated
Index Explanation
A Speed�Limit�Assistant�suggested�speed�adopted
B Speed�Limit�Assistant�suggested�speed�available
1 Speed�limit�is�confirmed�by�pressing�the�SET�button�on�the�MFL
2 Speed�limit
3 Speed�limit�available�to�be�adopted�by�pressing�the�SET�button�on�the�MFL
With�Speed�Limit�Assistant�the�speed�limit�can�be�adopted,�after�driver�confirmation,�as�the�new�set
speed�when�the�cruise�control�is�activated.
Manual�adoption�of�the�upcoming�speed�limit�must�be�activated�in�the�iDrive�menu�and�can�also�be
configured�and�deactivated�in�the�same�place.�Manual�adoption�is�executed�by�pressing�the�"SET
button"�on�the�multifunction�steering�wheel�(MFL).�Automatic�adoption�of�the�upcoming�speed�limit
is�not�available�for�the�US�market.
35
G05�settings�menu,�speed�assistance�in�the�CID:�Speed�Limit�Assistant
Index Explanation
1 Settings�menu:�"Speed�Limit�Assistant"
2 Speed�Limit�Assistant�switched�on
Speed�Limit�Assistant�can�be�set�in�the�iDrive�menu�under�the�following�menu�items:
• "Settings"
• "Driver�assistance"
• "Driving"
• "Speed�Limit�Assist"
36
8.�Automatic�Parking
Automatic�Parking�was�previously�known�as�Parking�Maneuvering�Assistant�(PMA).
The�control�module�is�still�referred�to�as�PMA�in�technical�systems.
8.1.�Maneuvering�out�of�a�parking�space
With�the�launch�of�the�Service�Pack�2018,�Automatic�Parking�supports�maneuvering�out�of�parallel
parking�spaces.�Here�the�system�assumes�acceleration,�braking�and�steering�until�the�vehicle�comes
to�a�stop�in�such�a�way�that�it�can�be�driven�by�the�driver�out�of�the�parking�space�without�further
steering�wheel�movement.�The�necessary�drive�position�changes�and�switching�on�the�turn�indicator
are�likewise�performed�by�the�PMA.�The�LED�lights�of�the�multifunction�steering�wheel�light�up�green
here.
This�function�is�planned�for�release�at�a�later�date.
G05�view,�parking�space�exit�function�in�the�CID�(maneuvering�by�means�of�Automatic�Parking)
The�driver�remains�responsible�for�maneuvering�out�of�the�parking�space�and�merging�into�traffic.
A�number�of�functional�requirements�must�be�met�to�enable�Automatic�Parking�to�maneuver�out�of�the
parking�space�automatically:
• The�vehicle�must�have�been�maneuvered�into�the�parking�space�with�Automatic�Parking
beforehand
• An�obstacle�must�be�detected�in�front�of�the�vehicle
• The�parking�space�must�be�at�least�0.8 m�longer�than�the�vehicle.
37
8.�Automatic�Parking
8.2.�Operation
The�function�menu�can�be�called�up�after�the�engine�has�started�by�pressing�the�parking�assistance
button�or�by�selecting�reverse�gear.�Then�the�function�can�be�selected�directly�via�the�controller�or�by
the�Central�Information�Display�(CID).
G05�Automatic�Parking�operation
Index Explanation
1 Instructions
2 Selection�option:�"Parking�space�exit�direction"
3 Selection�option:�"Automatic�Parking"
4 Selection�option:�"Back-up�Assistant"
5 Settings�menu:�"Camera�picture"�(brightness�and�contrast)
6 Settings�menu:�"Parking�and�maneuvering"
To�start�the�maneuvering�operation,�it�is�necessary�to�select�the�parking�space�exit�direction�via�the
controller�or�the�Central�Information�Display�(CID).�At�the�end�of�the�automatic�maneuvering�operation
the�driver�is�prompted�by�appropriate�instructions�in�the�Central�Information�Display�(CID)�to�assume
control�of�the�vehicle�again.
38
9.�Back-up�Assistant
9.1.�Functional�principle
The�Back-up�Assistant�supports�the�driver�when�reversing�out�of�entrances�and�narrow�streets�or�in
multi-story�parking�garages.�For�this�purpose,�the�Back-up�Assistant�stores�the�distance�travelled�and
the�steering�wheel�movements�made�before�the�vehicle�is�parked.�This�is�performed�automatically
under�a�speed�of�approximately 35 km/h�for�the�last�50 meters�covered�in�the�forward�direction.
G05�Back-up�Assistant�(examples�of�possible�applications)
After�the�Back-up�Assistant�is�activated,�the�vehicle�assumes�lateral�guidance�for�the�stored�distance
covered.�The�LED�displays�on�the�multifunction�steering�wheel�light�up�green�in�the�process.
The�driver�himself�remains�responsible�for�accelerating�and�braking.�A�change�of�environment�after
the�distance�covered�is�stored,�for�example�due�to�a�changed�parking�position�of�a�different�vehicle,�is
not�taken�into�consideration.�The�driver�is�thus�responsible�for�monitoring�the�vehicle�environment�and
must�brake�or�if�necessary�steer�himself�accordingly.
39
9.�Back-up�Assistant
9.2.�Operation
The�function�menu�can�be�called�up�after�the�engine�has�started�by�pressing�the�parking�assistance
button�or�by�selecting�reverse�gear.�Then�the�function�can�be�activated�directly�via�the�controller�or�in
the�Central�Information�Display�(CID).
G05�view,�Back-up�Assistant�in�the�CID
Index Explanation
1 Instructions
2 Selection�option:�"Automatic�Parking"
3 Selection�option:�"Back-up�Assistant"
4 Settings�menu:�"Camera�picture"�(brightness�and�contrast)
5 Settings�menu:�"Parking�and�maneuvering"
6 Visualization:�Remaining�distance�covered
7 Visualization:�Vehicle�assumes�lateral�guidance
The�remaining�distance�covered�is�displayed�during�the�automatic�reversing�maneuver.�At�the�end
of�the�stored�distance�covered�the�driver�is�prompted�by�appropriate�instructions�in�the�Central
Information�Display�(CID)�to�assume�control�of�the�steering�again.
40
Bayerische�Motorenwerke�Aktiengesellschaft
Händlerqualifizierung�und�Training
Röntgenstraße�7
85716�Unterschleißheim,�Germany
G05�Displays�and�Controls
BMW�Service
Symbols�used
Contents
1. Operating�Elements................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 1
1.1. Introduction..................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 1
1.1.1. New�features�in�the�G05.......................................................................................................................................... 1
1.1.2. Overview�of�the�interior.............................................................................................................................................. 2
1.1.3. Overview�of�displays....................................................................................................................................................... 3
1.1.4. Audio�operating�unit........................................................................................................................................................ 4
1.1.5. Heating�and�air�conditioning�controls..................................................................................................4
1.2. Center�console�switch�cluster...........................................................................................................................................................5
1.2.1. Variants................................................................................................................................................................................................. 6
1.2.2. Two-axle�ride�level�control..................................................................................................................................... 7
1.3. Light�operating�unit............................................................................................................................................................................................ 9
1.4. Doors..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 10
1.5. 12 V�power�sockets....................................................................................................................................................................................... 11
1.6. Air�conditioning�control�panel....................................................................................................................................................... 12
1.6.1. Air�conditioning�control�panel,�2nd�row�of�seats............................................................ 14
1.6.2. Heating�and�ventilation,�third-row�seating............................................................................... 14
2. Instrument�Cluster................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 16
2.1. Introduction................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 16
2.2. Connection...................................................................................................................................................................................................................16
3. Controller.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................18
3.1. Overview.......................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 18
3.2. Installation�location......................................................................................................................................................................................... 19
4. Central�Information�Display................................................................................................................................................................................. 20
4.1. ID7..............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................20
5. Gesture�Control........................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 22
5.1. Introduction................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 22
5.2. Installation�location......................................................................................................................................................................................... 23
6. Head‐Up�Display....................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 25
6.1. Introduction................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 25
7. Multifunction�Steering�Wheel........................................................................................................................................................................... 26
7.1. Variants...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................26
7.1.1. Assistance�systems..................................................................................................................................................... 26
7.1.2. Multimedia................................................................................................................................................................................... 27
7.1.3. Steering�wheel�heating...........................................................................................................................................29
1.�Operating�Elements
1.1.�Introduction
1.1.1.�New�features�in�the�G05
The�following�table�shows�the�new�features�of�and�changes�to�the�display�and�operating�elements�in
the�G05:
Function New�feature/change
Controller Controller�with�8�direct�access�keys
Central�Information�Display 12.3”�Central�Information�Display�with�a�Head
Unit�High�3
User�interface New�user�interface�ID7
Light�operating�unit Rotary�controller�has�been�replaced
by�push�buttons
1
1.1.2.�Overview�of�the�interior
The�interior�and�the�operating�area�(cockpit)�of�the�G05�have�been�newly�designed.�Among�the�new
features�is�the�new�layout�of�the�air�conditioning�control�and�the�audio�operating�unit.
The�following�graphic�shows�the�display�and�operating�elements�of�the�G05:
G05�overview�of�the�interior
Index Explanation
1 Instrument�cluster
2 Head‐Up�Display
3 Central�Information�Display
4 Air�conditioning�control�panel
6 Gear�selector�switch
7 Controller
8 Center�console�control�panel
9 Multifunction�steering�wheel
2
1.1.3.�Overview�of�displays
G05�overview�of�displays
Index Explanation
1 Head‐Up�Display�(HUD)
3
1.1.4.�Audio�operating�unit
G05�audio�operating�unit
Index Explanation
1 Band�AM/FM
2 Change�entertainment�source
3 Press:�Switch�sound�output�on/off;�turn:�Set�volume
4 Favorite�buttons
5 Press�once:�change�station/track;�press�and�hold:�fast�forward/rewind�track
1.1.5.�Heating�and�air�conditioning�controls
G05�heating�and�air�conditioning�controls
4
1.2.�Center�console�switch�cluster
The�following�graphic�shows�the�operating�elements�in�the�Center�console:
G05�Center�Operation�Unit
Index Explanation
1 Gear�selector�switch
2 Controller
3 Ride�level�control
4 xOffroad�mode
6 Electromechanical�holding�brake
7 Automatic�Hold
9 Start/Stop�button
5
Index Explanation
10 Activate/deactivate�engine�start/stop
11 Parking�Manoeuvring�Assistant
12 Surround�view
13 Dynamic�Stability�Control
1.2.1.�Variants
The�center�console�switch�cluster�consists�of�different�equipment�specifications:
• 2-axle�air�suspension�(SA�2VR)
• xOffroad�package�(SA�3E3)
• Glass�controls�(SA�4A2)
Center�console�switch�cluster�variants
6
Index Explanation
A Center�console�switch�cluster
B Center�console�switch�cluster�with�the�optional�equipment
Surround�View�Camera
C Center�console�switch�cluster�with�the�optional�equipment
Surround�View�Camera�and�Glass�controls
1.2.2.�Two-axle�ride�level�control
The�optional�equipment�self-levelling�suspension�(SA�2VR)�allows�variable�adjustments�to�be�made�to
the�front�and�rear�axle�through�which�the�suspension�is�adapted�to�the�vehicle�condition.
Using�the�xOffroad�operating�elements,�transmission�modes�are�activated�to�support�the�driver�by
making�various�adjustments�to�different�drive�and�chassis�and�suspension�systems�(SA�3E3).
Operating�strategy�of�xOffroad�chassis�and�suspension�package�in�the�G05
Index Explanation
A Driving�mode�"xSnow"
B Driving�mode�"xSand"
C Driving�mode�"xGravel"
D Driving�mode�"xRocks"
7
The�operating�elements�for�the�two-axle�ride�level�control�and�for�xOffroad�are�shown�in�the�following
graphic:
G05�two-axle�ride�level�control
Index Explanation
1 Ride�height�selection�switch�(optional�equipment�2–axle�air�suspension
SA�2VR)
2 xOffroad�operating�elements�(Driving�Experience�Control�for�optional
equipment�xOffroad�SA�3E3)
For�more�information�on�the�self-levelling�suspension�and�Offroad�mode,�refer�to�the�product
information�"G05�Powertrain/Chassis".
8
1.3.�Light�operating�unit
A�new�light�operating�unit�is�used�for�the�first�time�in�the�G05.�The�light�switch�element�is�situated�next
to�the�steering�wheel.�With�the�optional�equipment�Night�Vision�w/pedestrian�detection�(SA�6UK)�the
light�operating�unit�is�additionally�equipped�with�a�Night�Vision�button.
The�following�graphic�shows�a�light�operating�unit�that�features�the�maximum�equipment�specification.
G05�light�operating�unit
Index Explanation
1 Fog�light
2 Lights�off;�daytime�driving�lights
3 Automatic�driving�lights�control;�adaptive�lighting�functions
5 Night�Vision�(SA�6UK)
6 Instrument�lighting
7 Right�parking�light
8 Side�lights
9 Left�parking�light
9
1.4.�Doors
Overview�of�the�door�operating�unit:
G05�operating�element,�door,�driver's�side
Index Explanation
1 Memory�button
2 Button�for�adjusting�the�seat�position
3 Button�for�adjusting�the�seat�position
4 Button�for�massage�function
5 Gentleman�function,�front�passenger�seat
6 Button�for�adjusting�the�exterior�mirror
7 Select�the�mirror,�Automatic�Curb�Monitor
8 Fold�the�exterior�rearview�mirrors�in�and�out
9 Power�window�regulator,�passenger�side
10 Power�window�regulator,�driver's�side
11 Power�window�for�2nd�row�of�seats�on�passenger's�side
10
Index Explanation
12 Power�window�for�2nd�row�of�seats�on�driver's�side
13 Safety�switch
14 Button�for�locking�the�vehicle
15 Button�for�unlocking�the�vehicle
G05�power�window�switch,�2nd�row�of�seats
Index Explanation
1 Power�window�switch,�2nd�row�of�seats
1.5.�12 V�power�sockets
3�x�12 V�power�sockets�are�standard�equipment�in�the�G05.
The�12 V�socket�is�installed�in�the�following�areas:
• in�the�center�console�at�the�front
• in�the�2nd�row�of�seats
• in�the�luggage�compartment�trim�panel.
11
G05�installation�locations�of�12 V�power�sockets
Index Explanation
A 12 V�socket�in�the�center�console�at�the�front
B 12 V�socket�behind�the�center�armrest�in�the�2nd�row�of�seats
C 12 V�socket�in�the�luggage�compartment�trim�panel,�rear�right
1.6.�Air�conditioning�control�panel
An�integrated�automatic�heating/air�conditioning�system�with�3/2�zone�control�is�standard�equipment
in�the�G05.
It�controls�the�vehicle�interior�as�follows:
• Shared�temperature�control�for�rear�seat�passengers
• Automatic�program�with�5�intensity�levels�for�driver�and�front�passenger�separately.
An�integrated�automatic�heating/air�conditioning�system�with�4/3�zone�control�is�available�as�optional
equipment�on�the�xDrive�40i�(SA�4NB)�and�standard�on�the�xDrive50i.
12
G05�air�conditioning�control�panel,�fresh�air�grille
Index Explanation
1 Lever�for�changing�the�airflow�direction
2 Knurled�wheel�for�steplessly�opening�and�closing�the�ventilation�outlets
3 Hazard�warning�switch
4 Display
6 Active�seat�ventilation/seat�heating,�right
8 Air�recirculation�function
9 Manual�air�distribution�regulation,�right
10 Automatic�program,�right
12 Decrease/increase�amount�of�air,�right
13 Up�A/C�menu,�down�A/C�On/Off
14 Decrease/increase�amount�of�air,�left
16 Automatic�program,�left
17 Manual�air�distribution�regulation,�left
18 Rear�window�heating�on/off
19 Windscreen�defrosting/defogging
20 Active�seat�ventilation/seat�heating,�left
13
1.6.1.�Air�conditioning�control�panel,�2nd�row�of�seats
The�optional�equipment�integrated�automatic�heating/air�conditioning�system�with�4/3�zone�control
(SA�4NB)�includes�a�separate�air�conditioning�control�panel�in�the�center�console�at�the�rear�for�the
passengers�in�the�2nd�row�of�seats.
G05�air�conditioning�control�unit�for�automatic�rear�air-conditioning�system,�2nd�row�of�seats
Index Explanation
1 Seat�heating,�left
2 Automatic�program
4 Decrease/increase�amount�of�air
5 Manual�air�distribution�regulation
8 Seat�heating,�right
9 Display
1.6.2.�Heating�and�ventilation,�third-row�seating
With�the�optional�equipment�third-row�seating�(SA�4UB)�the�G05�is�equipped�with�heating�and
ventilation�in�the�third-row�seating.
The�air�in�the�area�of�the�third-row�seating�can�be�heated�or�circulated.�The�outlets�are�located�in�the
storage�area�between�the�seats�and�in�the�footwell�of�the�third-row�seating.
14
G05�heating�and�ventilation,�third-row�seating
Index Explanation
1 Button�for�switching�the�blower�on�and�off
2 Knurled�wheel�for�temperature�setting
3 Outlet
The�heating�in�the�third-row�seating�is�not�operational�unless�the�blower�is�activated.�After�the�heating
is�switched�off,�the�blower�can�be�used�to�circulate�the�interior�air,�e.g.�at�high�temperatures.
Further�information�on�the�heating�and�air�conditioning�systems�of�the�G05�can�be�found�in�the
Product�Information�"G05�Body".
15
2.�Instrument�Cluster
2.1.�Introduction
A�new�instrument�cluster�is�installed�in�the�G05.�The�displays�of�the�instrument�cluster�are�shown�on�a
12.3"�TFT�display.
G05�instrument�panel
2.2.�Connection
The�instrument�cluster�is�connected�with�the�Head�Unit�High�3�via�an�Ethernet�cable.
G05�connection�of�instrument�cluster�to�the�head�unit
Index Explanation
2 Head�unit
With�the�optional�equipment�Head-Up�Display�(SA�610)�the�Head-Up�Display�is�additionally�connected
with�the�instrument�cluster�via�an�APIX�connection.
16
2.�Instrument�Cluster
G05�connection�of�Head-Up�Display
Index Explanation
1 Head-Up�Display�(SA�610)
3 Head�Unit�High�3
17
3.�Controller
3.1.�Overview
A�new�controller�is�used�in�the�G05.�The�controller�has�8�direct�access�keys.
G05�controller�view
Index Explanation
1 Communication
2 Media
3 ConnectedDrive
4 Home
5 Navigation�map
6 Navigation
7 Option
8 Back
18
3.�Controller
3.2.�Installation�location
The�controller�is�situated�in�the�Center�Operation�Unit.
G05�controller�view
19
4.�Central�Information�Display
The�G05�is�equipped�with�a�Central�Information�Display�with�a�screen�diagonal�of�12.3”.
G05�Central�Information�Display
4.1.�ID7
The�G05�contains�a�new�user�interface.�This�is�called�ID7�(BMW�iDrive�7th�generation).
ID7�menu�view
Among�other�things,�the�menu�view�can�be�individually�adapted�with�the�ID7�user�interface.
20
4.�Central�Information�Display
Menu�views�of�the�ID7
Further�information�on�the�ID7�user�interface�can�be�found�in�the�Product�Information�"Displays�and
Controls�2018".
21
5.�Gesture�Control
5.1.�Introduction
Some�iDrive�functions�can�be�controlled�by�moving�the�hands�with�BMW�gesture�control.
In�the�G05�BMW�gesture�control�is�offered�as�optional�equipment�(SA�6U8).
With�gesture�control,�3�new�gestures�are�additionally�recognized�by�the�gesture�recognition�camera�in
the�G05.
New�gesture�functions
The�detection�range�of�the�gesture�recognition�camera�extends�from�the�steering�wheel�via�the�Central
Information�Display�(CID)�to�the�glove�box.
G05�detection�range,�gesture�recognition�camera
22
Further�information�and�an�overview�of�the�gesture�functions�used�in�the�G05�can�be�found�in�the
Product�Information�"Displays�and�Controls�2018".
5.2.�Installation�location
The�gesture�recognition�camera�is�integrated�in�the�roof�function�center�(FZD).
G05�installation�location,�gesture�recognition�camera
Index Explanation
A Roof�function�center
1 Gesture�recognition�camera
23
G05�system�wiring�diagram,�gesture�control
Index Explanation
3 CAN�terminator
4 Head�unit
24
6.�Head‐Up�Display
6.1.�Introduction
The�Head-Up�Display�(HUD)�projects�a�virtual,�transparent�image�onto�the�windscreen�in�the�driver's
field�of�view.
It�also�offers�the�driver�the�opportunity�to�see�all�the�information�relevant�to�the�driver�directly�in�his/her
field�of�view�floating�above�the�roadway.
The�Head-Up�Display�is�offered�as�optional�equipment�(SA�610)�in�the�G05.
G05�system�wiring�diagram�for�Head‐Up�Display
Index Explanation
4 Head�unit
5 Controller
7 Head‐Up�Display�(HUD)
25
7.�Multifunction�Steering�Wheel
7.1.�Variants
7.1.1.�Assistance�systems
The�following�graphic�provides�an�overview�of�the�assistance�system�buttons�on�the�multifunction
steering�wheel�with�the�maximum�equipment�specification.
Further�information�on�the�individual�equipment�specifications�can�be�found�in�the�product�information
"G05�Driver�Assistance�Systems".
G05�multifunction�steering�wheel,�assistance�systems
Index Explanation
1 Rocker�switch�for�changing�the�set�speed
2 LED�display
3 Speed�limit�ON/OFF
4 Increase�distance�to�the�vehicle�ahead
5 Button�for�selecting�the�assistance�system
Possible�selection:�Only�ACC�Stop�&�Go�or�ACC�Stop�&�Go
with�Steering�Assistant
26
Index Explanation
6 Button�for�activating�or�deactivating�the�assistance�system
selected�using�the�mode�button
7 Set�the�current�speed
On�vehicles�with�Automatic�Speed�Limit�Assistant:
Automatic�Speed�Limit�Assist�deactivated:
Adoption�of�the�suggested�speed�limit.
Automatic�Speed�Limit�Assist�activated:
Switch�back�to�the�last�set�speed�set
8 Reduce�distance�to�the�vehicle�ahead
9 Resume/Cancel�button�for�resuming�a�set�speed/temporarily
deactivating�the�cruse�control
7.1.2.�Multimedia
The�following�graphic�provides�an�overview�of�the�buttons�for�multimedia�applications�on�the
multifunction�steering�wheel:
G05�multifunction�steering�wheel,�multimedia
Index Explanation
1 Rocker�switch�-,�reduce�volume
2 Knurled�wheel,�select�in�the�selection�list
3 LED�display
4 Rocker�switch�+,�increase�volume
5 Press�once:�change�station/track;�press�and�hold:�fast�forward�track
27
Index Explanation
6 Voice�processing�system
7 Selection�lists
8 Telephone
9 Press�once:�change�station/track;�press�and�hold:�fast�rewind�track
The�Selection�lists�button�can�be�used�to�display�lists�such�as�the�Entertainment�list�or�the�playlist�in
the�instrument�cluster�or�in�the�Head-Up�Display.
Displays�of�selection�lists
Index Explanation
1 Display�of�the�playlist�in�the�Head-Up�Display
2 Entertainment�list�in�the�instrument�cluster
28
7.1.3.�Steering�wheel�heating
G05�steering�wheel�heating
Index Explanation
1 Button,�steering�wheel�heating
29
G05�Infotainment
BMW�Service
Symbols�used
G05�Infotainment
Contents
1. Head� Unit..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 1
1.1. Bus�overview................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 1
1.2. Head�Unit�High�3................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4
1.2.1. System�components....................................................................................................................................................... 5
1.2.2. System�wiring�diagram................................................................................................................................................ 6
1.2.3. Installation�location............................................................................................................................................................ 7
1.3. USB�ports...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................8
1.3.1. USB�variants.................................................................................................................................................................................8
1.3.2. System�wiring�diagram�for�USB�ports............................................................................................ 12
1.3.3. Installation�locations.................................................................................................................................................... 13
1.4. External�CD�player........................................................................................................................................................................................... 14
1.4.1. Introduction................................................................................................................................................................................14
1.4.2. Front�view.....................................................................................................................................................................................15
1.4.3. Rear�view....................................................................................................................................................................................... 15
1.4.4. Installation�location....................................................................................................................................................... 15
2. Telephone/Telematics...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 17
2.1. Bluetooth�hands-free�system........................................................................................................................................................ 17
2.2. Telephony�with�wireless�charging�(SA 6NW)......................................................................................................... 17
2.3. Smartphone�trays.............................................................................................................................................................................................. 21
2.4. Screen�mirroring................................................................................................................................................................................................. 22
3. Speaker�Systems..................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 23
3.1. Overview.......................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 23
3.2. Hi-Fi�system...............................................................................................................................................................................................................23
3.2.1. Component�overview................................................................................................................................................. 24
3.3. Top�HiFi�system................................................................................................................................................................................................... 26
3.3.1. Component�overview................................................................................................................................................. 27
3.4. Receiver�Audio�Module............................................................................................................................................................................30
3.4.1. Variants............................................................................................................................................................................................. 31
3.5. Booster............................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 34
3.5.1. Introduction................................................................................................................................................................................34
3.5.2. Variants............................................................................................................................................................................................. 34
G05�Infotainment
Contents
4. Aerial�system................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 36
4.1. Overview.......................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 36
4.2. Component�overview...................................................................................................................................................................................38
4.2.1. Vehicle�WLAN�aerial.................................................................................................................................................... 38
4.2.2. Bluetooth�aerial................................................................................................................................................................... 39
4.3.1. Multimedia................................................................................................................................................................................... 40
4.3.2. Telematics/connectivity.......................................................................................................................................... 42
G05�Infotainment
1.�Head�Unit
Bus�overview
1
G05�Infotainment
1.�Head�Unit
Index Explanation
Booster Booster
CON Controller
FDB Remote�control�receiver
IHKA Integrated�automatic�heating�/�air�conditioning
KAFAS Camera-based�Driver�Assistance�Systems
PMA Parking�Maneuvering�Assistant
2
G05�Infotainment
1.�Head�Unit
Index Explanation
SMBF Seat�module,�front�passenger
SMBA Seat�module,�driver
SMBFH Seat�module,�passenger�rear
SMFAH Seat�module,�driver�rear
SRSNVL Side�radar�sensor�short�range�front�left
SRSNVR Side�radar�sensor�short�range�front�right
VTG Transfer�box
WCA/NFC Wireless�charging�station�with�control�electronics�for�Near�Field
Communication
ZGM Central�gateway�module
1 Start-up�node�control�units�for�starting�and�synchronizing�the�FlexRay�bus
system
3
G05�Infotainment
1.�Head�Unit
1.2.�Head�Unit�High�3
A�new�generation�of�head�units�is�being�introduced�at�BMW�with�the�G05:�the�Head�Unit�High�3,�HU-
H3.
Head�Unit�High�3
Additionally,�the�user�interface�ID7�in�the�Central�Information�Display�has�been�designed�for�the�new
head�unit.
ID7�main�menu
4
G05�Infotainment
1.�Head�Unit
1.2.1.�System�components
Here�is�an�overview�of�the�iDrive�system�components�of�the�Head�Unit�High�3.
G05�Overview�of�system�components�for�head�unit
Index Explanation
4 Head�Unit
5 Multifunction�steering�wheel�(MFL)
5
G05�Infotainment
1.�Head�Unit
G05�System�wiring�diagram�HU-H3
6
G05�Infotainment
1.�Head�Unit
Index Explanation
6 Head�Unit
7 USB�port�type�A�in�the�center�console
8 USB�port�type�C�in�the�center�armrest
11 Fuses,�power�distribution�box,�luggage�compartment
12 Booster
1.2.3.�Installation�location
The�Head�Unit�High�3�is�located�in�the�front�section�of�the�center�console�below�the�center�stack.
Installation�location�of�Head�Unit�High�3
7
G05�Infotainment
1.�Head�Unit
1.3.�USB�ports
1.3.1.�USB�variants
Three�different�USB�ports�are�installed�in�the�G05,�depending�on�the�equipment:
• USB�type�A�with�charging�function�and�data�transfer
• USB�type�C�with�charging�function�and�data�transfer
• USB�type�C�with�charging�function.
Overview�of�USB�ports�in�the�G05
Index Explanation
1 USB�port�type�A�with�charging�function�and�data�transfer
2 USB�port�type�C�with�charging�function�and�data�transfer
3 USB�port�type�C�with�charging�function
Standard�equipment
The�following�USB�ports�are�installed�as�standard�equipment:
• USB�type�A�with�1.5�A�charging�function�and�data�transfer
• USB�type�C�with�3�A�charging�function�and�data�transfer
G05�Overview�of�standard�equipment�for�USB�ports
8
G05�Infotainment
1.�Head�Unit
Index Explanation
1 Head�Unit
2 USB�type�A�with�1.5�A�charging�function�and�data�transfer
3 USB�type�C�with�3.0�A�charging�function�and�data�transfer
4 Voltage�supply
Optional�equipment�Travel�and�Comfort�System�(SA�4FL)
Two�further�USB�ports�are�installed�in�combination�with�the�optional�equipment�Travel�and�Comfort
System�(SA�4FL).�These�are�located�on�the�backrests�of�the�front�seats�and�are�provided�for�the
passengers�in�the�2nd�row�of�seats.
The�USB�ports�in�the�2nd�row�of�seats�have�the�following�characteristics:
• USB�port�type�C
• For�charging�of�mobile�devices
• Charge�current:�maximum�3 A.
Overview�of�USB�ports�with�the�optional�equipment�Travel�and�Comfort�System
Index Explanation
1 Head�Unit
2 USB�type�A�with�1.5�A�charging�function�and�data�transfer
3 USB�type�C�with�3.0�A�charging�function�and�data�transfer
4 USB�type�C�with�3.0�A�charging�function
5 Voltage�supply
Additionally,�a�quick�connector�is�located�on�the�backrests�of�the�front�seats.�Accessories�for�the
optional�equipment�Travel�and�Comfort�System�can�be�attached�in�the�quick�connectors.
9
G05�Infotainment
1.�Head�Unit
Travel�and�Comfort�System
Index Explanation
1 USB�port�type�C
2 Quick�connector�for�optional�accessories
The�various�Travel�and�Comfort�System�components�are�inserted�and�locked�in�the�quick�connector.
The�following�accessories�are�available�for�the�Travel�and�Comfort�System:
10
G05�Infotainment
1.�Head�Unit
Overview�of�accessories�for�Travel�and�Comfort�System
Index Explanation
1 Tablet�safety�case
2 Universal�hook
3 Folding�table
4 Clothes�hangers
5 Holder�for�Action�Camera
6 Holder�for�Apple�iPad
7 Universal�holder�for�tablets�(only�in�combination�with�the�tablet�safety�cases)
11
G05�Infotainment
1.�Head�Unit
1.3.2.�System�wiring�diagram�for�USB�ports
System�wiring�diagram�for�USB�G05
Index Explanation
1 Body�Domain�Controller�(BDC)�(terminal�58g�for�the�dimmable�lighting)
3 USB�port�in�backrest�of�front�passenger�seat�(SA�4FL)
4 LED�in�backrest�of�front�passenger�seat�(SA�4FL)
5 Head�Unit
6 USB�connection�in�the�center�console�under�the�center�armrest
7 USB�port,�center�console�front
8 USB�port�in�backrest�of�driver's�seat�(SA�4FL)
9 LED�in�backrest�of�driver's�seat�(SA�4FL)
12
G05�Infotainment
1.�Head�Unit
1.3.3.�Installation�locations
The�following�graphic�shows�an�overview�of�the�installation�locations�of�the�USB�ports:
Installation�locations�of�the�USB�ports�in�the�G05
Index Explanation
a USB�port�type�A�with�charging�function�and�data�transfer�in�the�center�console
b USB�port�type�C�with�charging�function�and�data�transfer�in�the�center�armrest
c USB�port�type�C�with�charging�function�(SA�4FL)�behind�the�backrests�of�the
front�seats
13
G05�Infotainment
1.�Head�Unit
1.4.�External�CD�player
1.4.1.�Introduction
A�CD/DVD�drive�is�not�integrated�into�the�new�Head�Unit�High�3.�When�ordering�the�vehicle,�the
customer�can�also�order�the�optional�equipment�"Preparation�for�external�CD�player�(SA 65A)".�In
doing�so,�it�is�important�to�bear�in�mind�that�this�is�only�the�preparation�of�the�vehicle�wiring�harness
used�to�connect�the�external�CD�player.�The�external�CD�player�is�available�as�an�optional�accessory.
It�is�not�possible�subsequently�to�retrofit�the�optional�equipment�"Preparation�for�external�CD�player
(SA 65A)"�to�the�vehicle.
When�purchasing�the�optional�accessories,�the�frame�and�the�CD�player�are�installed�in�the�vehicle�at
the�workshop.�The�CD�player�is�automatically�detected�by�the�head�unit�once�the�vehicle�has�gone�to
sleep.�Coding�is�therefore�also�not�necessary.
The�external�CD�player�is�installed�in�the�glove�compartment.
Audio�data�read�by�the�CD�player�is�transferred�to�the�head�unit�via�a�USB�connection�or�ID3�tags.
The�head�unit�processes�the�data�and�forwards�it�to�the�Receiver�Audio�Module,�which�has�the�task�of
playing�the�music�back�via�the�loudspeakers.
The�CD�player�supports�the�following�file�formats,�among�others:
• MP3
• M4A
• WAV
• CD-DA
• FLAC
• ID3�tag.
DVDs�are�not�detected�by�the�CD�player.�The�external�CD�player�has�no�diagnostic�capability.
14
G05�Infotainment
1.�Head�Unit
1.4.2.�Front�view
Front�view�of�external�CD�player
1.4.3.�Rear�view
The�following�graphic�shows�the�USB�port�of�the�CD�player.
Rear�view�of�external�CD�player
Index Explanation
1 USB�port
The�external�CD�player�is�located�in�the�upper�section�of�the�glove�compartment.
Installation�location�of�external�CD�player
15
G05�Infotainment
1.�Head�Unit
Index Explanation
A CD�player�in�engaged�state
B CD�player�in�extended�state
1 CD�player
When�the�external�CD�player�is�gently�pressed�from�below,�a�spring�mechanism�in�the�latch�is�triggered
which�causes�the�CD�player�to�move�down�mechanically.�The�CD�player�must�be�pushed�up�to�the�limit
position�in�order�to�lock�the�mechanism.�During�this�movement,�the�spring�mechanism�is�tensioned
and�the�latch�is�locked.
16
G05�Infotainment
2.�Telephone/Telematics
The�G05�offers�the�following�telephone�systems:
• Bluetooth�hands-free�system�(standard�equipment)
• Telephony�with�wireless�charging�(SA 6NW).
2.1.�Bluetooth�hands-free�system
The�G05�is�equipped�with�a�Bluetooth�hands-free�system�as�standard.
Features Bluetooth�hands-free�system�(standard
equipment)
Number�of�mobile�phones 2�mobile�phones�can�be�active�at�the�same
time.
USB�ports 2
Wireless�charging —
Bluetooth�audio Yes
Screen�mirroring Yes
Number�of�microphones 1�(driver's�side)
Wi-Fi�hotspot�preparation —
WLAN�hotspot�(SA�6WD) —
Office�functions —
NFC�for�BMW�Digital�Key Yes�(with�SA 322)
Connection�to�the�telephone�aerial�of�the —
vehicle
2.2.�Telephony�with�wireless�charging�(SA 6NW)
The�wireless�charging�station�is�available�as�optional�equipment�for�the�G05.�The�vehicle�can�be
equipped�with�NFC�for�BMW�Digital�Key�(SA�322)�independently�of�the�optional�equipment�Telephony
with�wireless�charging�(SA�6NW).
An�LTE�compensator�is�provided�in�vehicles�equipped�with�SA 6NW�which�has�the�task�of�amplifying
the�aerial�signals.
Features Telephony�with�wireless�charging�(SA�6NW)
Number�of�mobile�phones 2�mobile�phones�and�an�audio�player�can�be
active�at�the�same�time.
USB�ports 2
Wireless�charging Yes
Bluetooth�audio Yes
17
G05�Infotainment
Features Telephony�with�wireless�charging�(SA�6NW)
Screen�mirroring Yes
Number�of�microphones 2�(driver's�and�passenger's�side)
Wi-Fi�hotspot�preparation Yes
WLAN�hotspot�(SA�6WD) Optional�equipment�(SA�6WD)
Office�functions Yes,�depending�on�telephone
NFC�for�BMW�Digital�Key Yes�(with�SA 322)
Connection�to�the�telephone�aerial�of�the Yes
vehicle
Wireless�charging�station�(SA�6NW)�with�NFC�for�BMW�Digital�Key�(SA�322)
The�wireless�charging�station�in�the�G05�is�located�in�front�of�the�cup�holder.�The�wireless�charging
station�is�installed�crosswise�in�combination�with�the�optional�equipment�Heated�and�Cooled
Cupholders�(SA�442).
18
G05�Infotainment
G05�Wireless�charging�station�installation�location
Index Explanation
A Wireless�charging�station
B Wireless�charging�station�in�combination�with�the�optional�equipment�Heated
and�Cooled�Cupholders�(SA 442)
19
G05�Infotainment
G05�System�wiring�diagram�for�wireless�charging�with�NFC
20
G05�Infotainment
Index Explanation
1 Microphone,�driver's�side
2 Microphone�on�passenger's�side�(in�combination�with�telephony�with�wireless
charging�(SA�6NW))
5 Head�Unit
6 WLAN�aerial�for�vehicle�WLAN
7 Bluetooth�aerial
9 Wireless�charging�station�(WCA)�with�Near�Field�Communication�(NFC)
10 Remote�control�receiver
11 Telematic�Communication�Box�2�(TCB2)�with�integrated�WLAN�aerial�for�Wi-Fi
hotspot
12 GSM�aerial�for�emergency
13 TEL1�aerial�(customer's�mobile�phone�connection)
14 TEL2�aerial
15 SDARS�aerial�SAT�for�the�navigation
17 LTE�compensator
2.3.�Smartphone�trays
2�different�smartphone�trays�with�NFC�electronics�are�used:
• Wireless�charging�and�NFC�electronics
• Smartphone�tray�with�NFC�electronics.
Only�a�smartphone�tray�with�NFC�is�installed�in�vehicles�without�the�optional�equipment�Telephony
with�wireless�charging�(SA�6NW)�but�with�the�optional�equipment�Comfort�Access�(SA�322).�The
smartphone�cannot�be�charged�in�this�tray�but�can�be�placed�there�in�order�to�use�the�BMW�Digital
Key.�This�kind�of�tray�is�easy�to�identify�because�there�is�no�indicator�light�or�battery�symbol�on�the�tray.
21
G05�Infotainment
Index Explanation
1 Wireless�charging�station�with�NFC�electronics
2 Smartphone�tray�with�NFC�electronics
2.4.�Screen�mirroring
The�screen�of�a�smartphone�can�be�displayed�on�the�Central�Information�Display�by�establishing�a�Wi-
Fi�direct�connection�between�the�smartphone�and�Head�Unit.
The�sound�is�played�back�via�the�loudspeakers�in�the�vehicle.
G05�view�of�screen�mirroring
The�Head�Unit�cannot�decide�which�screen�contents�are�streamed�to�the�vehicle�via�screen�mirroring.
In�the�interest�of�traffic�safety,�the�contents�in�the�CID�are�switched�off�when�driving�at�speeds�of
7 km/h�or�more.
Screen�mirroring�can�therefore�only�be�used�when�the�vehicle�is�at�a�standstill.
22
G05�Infotainment
3.�Speaker�Systems
3.1.�Overview
In�the�G05,�two�speaker�systems�are�offered.�A�Hi-Fi�stereo�system�is�installed�as�standard�equipment.
The�G05�comes�with�2�different�speaker�systems,�depending�on�equipment:
• Hi-Fi�system�(SA 676)�(standard�equipment)
• Top�HiFi�system�(Harman�Kardon�surround�sound�system�(SA�688)).
The�high-end�Bowers�&�Wilkins�Diamond�surround�sound�system�will�be�available�in�the�G05�from
December�2018.
Hi-Fi�system�(SA 676) Top�HiFi�(Harman�Kardon
surround�sound�system
(SA 688))
Overall�power 205 W 464 W
Number�of�tweeters 3 7
Number�of�broadband — —
loudspeakers
Number�of�mid-range 5 7
speakers
Number�of�bass 2 2
loudspeakers
Amplifier Receiver�Audio�Module Receiver�Audio�Module�and
Booster
3.2.�Hi-Fi�system
The�Hi-Fi�system�is�composed�of�the�following�components:
• 3�tweeters
• 5�mid-range�speakers
• 2�bass�speakers
• Receiver�Audio�Module�(RAM).
The�amplifier�for�the�stereo�system�is�located�in�the�Receiver�Audio�Module.
23
G05�Infotainment
3.2.1.�Component�overview
G05�System�overview�Hi-Fi�system
Index Explanation
3 Head�Unit
4 Tweeter,�front
5 Mid-range�speaker,�front
6 Bass�speakers
7 Mid-range�speaker,�rear
8 Speaker�for�outside�sound�(Not�for�US)
10 Booster
24
G05�Infotainment
G05�system�wiring�diagram�of�Hi-Fi�system
25
G05�Infotainment
Index Explanation
3 Head�Unit
5 Tweeter,�front�right
6 Mid-range�speaker,�front�right
8 Mid-range�speaker,�rear�right
10 Booster
12 Loudspeakers�for�outside�sound�(Not�for�US)
13 Mid-range�speaker,�rear�left
15 Tweeter,�front�left
16 Mid-range�speaker,�front�left
3.3.�Top�HiFi�system
The�Harman�Kardon�Surround�Sound�system�is�composed�of�the�following�components:
• 7�tweeters
• 7�mid-range�speakers
• 2�bass�speakers
• Receiver�Audio�Module�(RAM)
• Booster
26
G05�Infotainment
3.3.1.�Component�overview
G05�System�overview�Top�HiFi�system
Index Explanation
3 Head�Unit
4 Tweeter,�front
5 Mid-range�speaker,�front
6 Bass�speakers
7 Mid-range�speaker,�rear
8 Tweeter,�rear
9 Tweeter,�D-pillar
27
G05�Infotainment
Index Explanation
10 Mid-range�speaker,�D-pillar
12 Booster
13 Speaker�for�outside�sound�(Not�for�US)
28
G05�Infotainment
G05�system�wiring�diagram�of�Top�HiFi�system
29
G05�Infotainment
Index Explanation
3 Head�Unit
5 Mid-range�speaker,�front�right
6 Tweeter,�front�right
8 Mid-range�speaker,�rear�right
9 Tweeter,�rear�right
10 Tweeter,�right�D-pillar
11 Mid-range�speaker,�right�D-pillar
14 Booster
15 Mid-range�speaker,�left�D-pillar
16 Tweeter,�left�D-pillar
17 Tweeter,�rear�left
18 Mid-range�speaker,�rear�left
20 Loudspeakers�for�outside�sound�(SA�1MA)�(Not�for�US)
21 Tweeter,�front�left
22 Mid-range�speaker,�front�left
3.4.�Receiver�Audio�Module
The�Receiver�Audio�Module�(RAM)�is�being�used�for�the�first�time�in�the�G05.
Depending�on�the�equipment,�the�following�functions�are�integrated�in�the�RAM:
• AM/FM�tuner
• SDARS-Tuner
• Aerial�diversity�module
• Audio�amplifier�(stereo�system,�Hi-Fi�system).
30
G05�Infotainment
3.4.1.�Variants
Two�variants�of�the�RAM�are�used�in�the�G05,�depending�on�the�equipment:
• RAM�mid
• RAM�high.
Overview�of�the�RAM�variants�in�the�G05
Index Explanation
1 Receiver�audio�module�RAM�mid
2 Receiver�audio�module�RAM�high
31
G05�Infotainment
G05�System�wiring�diagram�for�Receiver�Audio�Module
32
G05�Infotainment
Index Explanation
1 Head�Unit
3 Fuses�in�the�power�distribution�box�of�the�luggage�compartment
5 Booster
The�Receiver�Audio�Module�is�located�in�the�luggage�compartment�on�the�left�behind�the�side�trim
panel.
G05�Installation�location�of�Receiver�Audio�Module
Index Explanation
a Receiver�Audio�Module�(RAM)
b Booster
33
G05�Infotainment
3.5.�Booster
3.5.1.�Introduction
The�Booster�is�used�in�the�G05�and�is�an�additional�audio�amplifier�in�the�vehicle.
3.5.2.�Variants
The�Booster�is�installed�in�the�G05�with�the�following�optional�equipment:
• Harman�Kardon�Surround�Sound�System�(SA�688).
G05�View�of�Booster
The�Booster�is�located�in�the�luggage�compartment�on�the�left�behind�the�side�trim�panel.
34
G05�Infotainment
G05�Installation�location�of�Booster
Index Explanation
a Receiver�Audio�Module�(RAM)
b Booster
35
G05�Infotainment
4.�Aerial�system
4.1.�Overview
The�following�graphic�gives�you�an�overview�of�the�aerial�system�of�the�G05.
G05�overview�of�aerial�system
Index Explanation
1 Roof�aerial�(SAT�aerial�for�the�navigation,�TEL1�and�TEL2�aerial,�SDARS�aerial)
2 Interference�suppression�filter�for�the�additional�brake�light
3 Wave�trap�for�the�rear�window�heating
4 Remote�control�receiver
5 FM1�aerial
6 FM2�aerial
8 Aerial�amplifier�(AM,�FM1,�FM2�aerial)
9 AM�aerial
36
G05�Infotainment
The�following�table�shows�the�different�aerial�systems:
Aerial System Installation�location

FM�aerial Radio • FM1�aerial�in�the�rear
window
• FM2�aerial�in�the�roof
spoiler
AM�aerial Radio AM�aerial�sensor�in�the�roof

spoiler
SDARS�aerial Radio Roof�aerial
SAT�aerial Navigation�system Roof�aerial
Telephone�aerial Telephone Roof�aerial
Bluetooth�aerial Telephone Integrated�in�the�wiring
harness
WLAN�aerial Telephone Integrated�in�the�wiring
harness
Wi-Fi�hotspot�aerial Telephone Telematic�Communication�Box
2
GSM�aerial�for�emergency Telephone Telematic�Communication�Box
2
37
G05�Infotainment
4.2.�Component�overview
4.2.1.�Vehicle�WLAN�aerial
The�following�graphic�shows�an�overview�of�the�installation�locations�of�the�Bluetooth�aerial�and�also
the�vehicle�WLAN�aerial:
G05�Aerials
Index Explanation
a Rear�view�of�center�console
2 Vehicle�WLAN�aerial
38
G05�Infotainment
4.2.2.�Bluetooth�aerial
The�installation�location�of�the�Bluetooth�aerial�is�shown�in�the�following�graphic:
G05�Bluetooth�aerial
Index Explanation
39
G05�Infotainment
4.3.1.�Multimedia
G05�multimedia�aerial
40
G05�Infotainment
Index Explanation
4 SDARS�aerial
6 Aerial�amplifier
7 FM2�aerial
8 AM/FM1�aerial
11 Head�Unit
41
G05�Infotainment
4.3.2.�Telematics/connectivity
G05�telematics�aerial
42
G05�Infotainment
Index Explanation
1 Microphone,�driver's�side
2 Microphone�on�passenger's�side�(in�combination�with�telephony�with�wireless
charging�(SA�6NW))
5 Head�Unit
8 Wireless�charging�station�(WCA)�with�Near�Field�Communication�(NFC)
10 WLAN�aerial�for�Wi-Fi�hotspot
11 TEL1�aerial�(customer's�mobile�phone�connection)
12 TEL2�aerial
13 SDARS�aerial�SAT�for�the�navigation
14 GSM�aerial�for�emergency
15 Fuses�in�the�power�distribution�box�of�the�luggage�compartment
43

ST1831 G05 Complete Vehicle

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

ST1831 G05 Complete Vehicle

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Ref

1st�generation 2nd�generation 3rd�generation 4th�generation

Index Explanation Unit F15�X5 G05�X5�xDrive50i

Explanation Unit F15 G05

Model Engine Displacement Power�in Torque�in

Models Unit Vehicle�curb�weight�(US)

Function Sports�seat Multi-contour�seat

Model Engine Power�output Torque Displacement

Model Engine Rear�axle�final�drive Transformation�ratio

Basic -�-�- -�-�- -�-�- -�-�-

Offroad�mode Accelerator�pedal Transmission

Offroad�mode xDrive Efficiency�Mode

xSnow -�-�- -�-�- -�-�-

Offroad�mode Air�suspension EDC DSCi

systems Snow Sand Gravel Rock

Air�suspension G12 G05

Air�suspension�strut Front�axle Rear�axle

Index Explanation Active Inactive

Index Explanation Active Inactive

Index Explanation Active Inactive

Level Height�in Speed Operation

High�level +20 Activation�range:

Normal�level +/–0 Vehicle�level�without

Speed Time Driving�level

Puncture Rear�left�wheel Rear�right�wheel

Index Explanation Active Inactive

Index Explanation Manufacturer

Index Explanation Manufacturer

Variable Characteristics Tire�type Tire�size

Sidewall�lugs Deflection�ribs Rim�protection�rib

12. Door� Mirror...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................98

13. Seats........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 100

14. Panorama�Roof......................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 109

15. Steering�Column�Switch�Cluster............................................................................................................................................................ 111

16. Locking�and�Security�Functions............................................................................................................................................................. 113

17. Interior�Mirror............................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 125

Terminal�30F Terminal�30B Terminal�15N

ST1604�G30�Driver • Collision�warning • Surround�view

Name�of�System�in Name�of�System�in Name�of�System�in

Aerial System Installation�location

AM�aerial Radio AM�aerial�sensor�in�the�roof

You might also like